(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 

Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 



ff^> 



/*■■ i'.*^ 









TTW'"'- ^'.i-' .- 




/ ■ • 






' • 


Li. »•' — 2G ■-;:.■ -"v*' 








'%*^ 


.^^-"taSf 


fcL- -- - - ^ ' .r ^*. ..., ^. ■ *7vr 




V*.~ J** 


Kir./, . •i^W.^fe- .-^ --> J,.-.V 




-.« .«i« 


fe.- .*- .?•' "T*,,;^/-.,* ?jf-\ 




. -^?^«* .:^ 


Ev,,--' --^'iT'. '" ";-■ •. :' 


. , ' -u- 


«•,.•*;„_,---, 


■y 1 .'■'' ' -■ ■ - .-'■': 




in . 


^^* v-* - 




^« 


SEi;.: ;_^ ,. ■ - ^''•^-..-. 


^*^ K. 





.^^*!io*''^ 



CATALOG 1988-1989 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 

in 2010 with funding from 

Lyrasis IVIembers and Sloan Foundation 



http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198889lyco 




Founded 1812 



LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 



Williamsport, Pennsylvania 




CATALOG '8 8- '8 9 



Communicating n^ith Lycoming College 



Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Director of Admissions: 

Admissions; requests for publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses 

Director of Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan fund; financial assistance 

Dean of College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities 

Dean of Student Services: 

Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; 
academic support services 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities 

Executive Director for College Advancement: 
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations: 
Alumni information; parent support 

Director of Public and Media Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information; media relations 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Wiliiamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 

The College telephone number is (717) 321-4000 

Visitors 



Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call 
the Office of Admissions (717) 321-4126 before your visit to arrange a mutually 
convenient time. 

Toll Free Numbers 

Pennsylvania Only 1-800-235-3920 

Outside Pennsylvania 1-800-345-3920 

Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age. sex. race, 
religion, handicap. Hnances. national or ethnic origin, or color Lycoming does not discnminate on the 
basis of age. sex. race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the 
administration of any of its policies and programs. 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 23 

Student Services 65 

Admission 67 

Financial Matters 69 

The Campus 74 

Academic Calendar, 1988-1989 76 

Directory 77 

Administrative Staff/Faculty 78 

The Alumni Association 87 

Index 89 



The general regulations and policies stated in this catalog arc in effect for the 1988-89 academic year. Students 
beginning their first term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1988 or the spring of 1989 are thereafter governed by the 
policies slated in this catalog. Requirements governing a student's major are those m effect ui the time a major is 
formally declared and officially accepted by the major department 

if changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog lo either general requirements or major requirements. 
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version, but the 
College always reserves the right to determine which requirements apply. 

If a student intenupis his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in effect ai the time of 
readmission will apply. Students on an approved leave of absence retain the same requirements they had when they 
entered, if their leaves do not extend beyond one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and prwedures stated in this catalog without 
prior notice to those who may be affected by them Tlie provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an 
irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the student and Lycoming College. 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing the 
type of learning that can be used for a 
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance 
derives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 
strategies while they learn to communi- 
cate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to productive 
and fulfilling lives in many fields while 
allowing lifelong growth and develop- 
ment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 31 major fields, a bachelor of 
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of the 



liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration, it allows students to study 
in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they are 
interested in teaching, medicine, law, 
dentistry, or the ministry, they can take 
courses needed to enter their advanced 
study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, 
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through 
cooperative programs operated by 
Lycoming with other colleges and uni- 
versities. Or. they can study abroad or in 
Philadelphia. Pa.. Washington. D.C.or 
New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their program 
of study in four years, usually by taking 
four courses each fall and spring semes- 
ter. But students also can take one course 




during Lycoming's May term, or two 
courses during the summer term. 

Recognizing students' concerns about 
careers. Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Develop- 
ment Center and advisory committees for 
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre- 
medical students. The College also oper- 
ates a wide-ranging internship program 
that allows students to earn academic 
credit while working at area businesses, 
government offices, and nonprofit orga- 
nizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of students to faculty 
is 15 to one. which means that most 
classes are small and there is abundant 
opportunity for individual attention. All 
faculty members teach. More than 70 
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the 
highest degrees in their fields from the 
nation's outstanding colleges and univer- 
sities. And, faculty members take their 
advising seriously. They care about stu- 
dents, and encourage and guide them so 
they receive the education they want. 

Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modern buildings 
include the eight residence halls; the 
library; the Academic Center, which 
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium, 
computer center, and art gallery; the stu- 
dent union; the physical education/ 
recreation center, including a six-lane, 
25-yard pool; a completely renovated 
fine arts center with excellent facilities to 
accommodate sculpture, painting, 
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and 
photography; and a music building, 
which houses individual music practice 
rooms and an electronic-music studio. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1.250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 
friendly and comfortable, with all of the 
buildings easy to reach from anywhere 
on campus. Students come from a variety 
of economic classes, religious beliefs, 
and geographic areas, although most stu- 
dents call Pennsylvania. New Jersey, or 
New York their home. They work and 
play together in an atmosphere of respect 
and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of extra- 



curricular activities. Recent Artist 
Series events have included the Broad- 
way musical Big River, The Royal Win- 
nipeg Ballet. The Northeastern Pennsyl- 
vania Philharmonic. Late Great Ladies 
of Jazz and Blues, internationally 
acclaimed mime Marcel Marceau. and 
satirist Mark Russell. Admission to all 
Artist Series events is free for Lycoming 
students. Student government groups 
help to plan campus activities and social 
events. Numerous clubs, honor societ- 
ies, social fraternities and sororities, the 
student newspaper, yearbook and liter- 
ary magazine, and the band and widely 
acclaimed choir meet other student 
interests. Students who like to perform 
or compete can act on the Arena Theatre 
stage or play on intercollegiate or intra- 
mural sports teams. Intercollegiate 
teams for men include football, soccer, 
basketball, wrestling, tennis, golf, 
swimming, track and field, and cross 
country. Intercollegiate teams for 
women include basketball, tennis, field 
hockey, swimming, track and field, and 
cross country. 

In addition, students who like hiking. 



backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing, 
hunting, kayaking, spelunking, and 
other outdoor sports will find Lycom- 
ing's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the West 
Branch of the Susquehanna River in 
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills 
and valleys. Yet. the College is within a 
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers 
such as New York City, Philadelphia, 
Pittsburgh, Washington, DC Balti- 
more. Syracuse, Rochester, and the New 
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport- 
metro area is home to about 75 ,000 per- 
sons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of provid- 
ing an education for persons of all faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a mem- 
ber of the Middle States Association of 
Colleges and Schools, and the University 
Senate of The United Methodist Church. 
It is a member of the Association of 
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania 
Association of Colleges and Universi- 



ties, the Commission for Independent 
Colleges and Universities, the National 
Commission on Accrediting, and the 
National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist 
Church. 



HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an 
elementary and secondary school. 
Thirty-six years later, the academy 
became the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary under the patronage of The 
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi- 
nary operated as a private boarding 
school until 1929. when a college curri- 
culum was added and it became the Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and 
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col- 
lege became a four-year degree-granting 
college of liberal arts and sciences. It 
adopted the name Lycoming, derived 
from the Indian word "lacomic." 
meaning "Great Stream." The word 
Lycoming has been common to north- 
central Pennsylvania since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF 
ARTS DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the principle 
that a liberal arts education is the best 
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con- 
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is 
conferred upon the student who has 
completed an educational program 
incorporating the two principles of the 
liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration. The objective of the dis- 
tribution principle is to insure that the 
student achieves breadth in learning 
through the study of the major dimen- 
sions of human inquiry: the humanities. 
the social sciences, and the natural sci- 
ences. The objective of the concentra- 
tion principle is to provide depth of 
learning through completion of a pro- 
gram of study in a given discipline or 
subject area known as the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution 
program. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achieving 
a minimum grade point average of 
2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and 
review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 

— pass a minimum of 32 units ( 128 
semester hours) with a minimum 
cumulative average of 2.0. Addi- 
tional credits beyond 1 28 semester 
hours may be completed provided 
the minimum 2.0 cumulative aver- 
age is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 
degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 



incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 
within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specific 
requirements are made by the Commit- 
tee on Academic Standing. 

THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci- 
fically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a syn- 
thesis of three diverse forms of educa- 
tion: a studio art program that emphas- 
izes the skills and concepts of the visual 
language; an apprenticeship that takes 
technical expertise as the departure 
point, and the scholastic method 
employed in both art history and the 
general-education component. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 12-course Art 
Department course of study. 

— complete the distribution pro- 
gram. 

— pass a minimum of .^2 units ( 128 
semester hours) with a minimum 
cumulative average of 2.0. 
taken within the College. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the John- 
son Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and 
review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 



degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— have a public exhibition of origi- 
nal art work and make an oral 
defense. 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
IN NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women as 
beginning practitioners of professional 
nursing, qualified for first-level posi- 
tions in a variety of health settings and 
for graduate study in nursing. Upon 
satisfactory completion of the program, 
a graduate is eligible to write the State 
Board of Nursing examination for licen- 
sure as a registered nurse. The goal of 
the program is to develop a liberally 
educated and self-directed individual 
who is prepared to contribute to the wel- 
fare of the nation through the practice of 
professional nursing which supports the 
promotion and restoration of health of 
individuals and families in a variety of 
settings. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 

IN NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 13-course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ments for the BSN degree. 

— complete a minimum of 32 units 
( 128 semester hours) with a mini- 
mum cumulative average of 2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
can after an examination and 
review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 



— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 
degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to meet 
this requirement must petition for 
an extension. 

WRITING ACROSS 

THE CURRICULUM PROGRAM 

L Purpose 

The Lycoming College Writing 
Across the Curriculum Program has 
been developed in response to the con- 
viction that writing skill promotes intel- 
lectual growth and is a hallmark of the 
educated person. The program has 
therefore been designed to achieve two 
major, interrelated objectives: 

(1) to enhance student learning in 
general and subject mastery in parti- 
cular, and 

(2) to develop students" abilities to 
communicate clearly. In this pro- 
gram students are given opportuni- 
ties to write in a variety of contexts 
and in a substantial number of 
courses, in which they receive 
faculty guidance and reinforcement. 

IL Program Requirements 

In order to graduate from Lycoming 
all students must complete the following 
writing requirements; 

A. English 005, Developmental 
English, or exemption from the 
course. 

B. English 106. Composition and 
one other English course. 

C. A writing component in all dis- 
tribution courses completed at 
Lycoming. 

D. Two courses designated as 
writing-intensive, or "W" 
courses. 

(1) Successful completion of 
English 106 is a prerequisite 
for enrollment in writing- 
intensive courses. 

(2) All courses designated "W" 
are numbered 200 or above. 



(3) Each student must complete 
one "W course from 
among those offered by the 
major department, or. with 
departmental approval, from 
a related department. The 
other "W course com- 
pleted must be from a depart- 
ment other than the major 
department. In the case of 
students with multiple 
majors, one "W" course 
must be completed from one 
of those majors. The second 
course may be taken m one 
of the student's other majors. 

(4) Students should take one 
"W" course during the 
sophomore year and one 
during the junior year — 
though other sequences are 
possible and may in certain 
circumstances be advisable. 

(5) A writing intensive course 
may not duplicate a course 
taken to satisfy II. B. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only one 
distribution requirement. Courses for 
which a grade of "S"" is recorded may 
not be used toward the fulfillment of the 
distribution requirements. (Refer to 
page 10 for an explanation of the grad- 
ing system.) A course in any of the fol- 
lowing distribution requirements refers 
to a full-unit (four semester hours) 
course taken at Lycoming, any appro- 
priate combination of fractional unit 
courses taken at Lycoming which accu- 
mulate to four semester hours, or any 
single course of three or more semester 
hours transferred from another institu- 
tion. For the BSN degree, see special 
modified distribution requirements on 
page 7. 

English — Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic writ- 
ing skills and to pass English 106 and 
one other unit of English. Competence 
in basic writing skills may be demon- 
strated either by passing the Achieve- 
ment Examination in English Composi- 



tion or by earning a Satisfactory in 
English 005. A student must demon- 
strate this competence before being per- 
mitted to enroll in English 106. Unless 
impossible because of failure to com- 
plete English 005, English 106 must be 
taken during the freshman year: English 
106 or consent of instructor is required 
before enrolling in any other English 
course. Students may choose any course 
from the department's offerings to satis- 
fy the requirement for another unit in 
English. 

Foreign Language or Matliematics 

— Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a fore- 
ign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, 
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are 
required to pass two courses on the 
intermediate or higher course level. 
Placement at the appropriate course 
level will be determined by the faculty 
of the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures. Students who have 
completed two or more years of a given 
language in high school are not admitted 
for credit to the elementary course in the 
same foreign language except by written 
permission of the chairman of the 
department. French 228 and Spanish 
331 will meet part of this requirement 
only if the section taught in the language 
is completed. 

Mathematics. Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic algeb- 
ra and to pass three units of Mathemati- 
cal science other than Mathematics 005. 
Competence in basic algebra may be 
demonstrated either by passing the basic 
algebra section of the Mathematics 
Placement Examination or by passing 
Mathematics 005. By demonstrating 
higher competence on the Mathematics 
Placement Examination, students may 
reduce the requirement to two units of 
mathematical science. No more than 
one unit may be taken in computer sci- 
ence. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in either 



religion or philosophy. Any two religion 
courses may be used to fulfill the 
philosophy/religion distribution require- 
ment, with this exception: only one 
course from the combination Religion 
120-121 may be selected for distribu- 
tion. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art, lit- 
erature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature courses 
selected from the offerings of the 
Departments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures (French, 
German, or Spanish). 

Music. Any combination of eight (8) 
credits, including applied music, 
ensemble, and music department 
courses. 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by select- 
ing any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 100, 110, 140, 
148, 332, 333, or other courses with the 
consent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are 
required to pass any two courses in one 
of the following disciplines: astronomy 
and physics, biology, or chemistry. 

History and Social Science — Students 
are required to pass two courses as indi- 
cated in economics, history, political 
science, psychology, or sociology/ 
anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except 
History 222. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 1 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology/Anthropology. Sociology/ 
Anthropology 1 10 plus another course. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — standard requirement 

as shown above. 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or 
exemption from Math 005; Mathe- 



matics 103; and Computer Science 
108, 125, or Mathematics 214. 
Religion and Philosophy — Relig- 
ion 120 and Philosophy 219. 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two 
courses from one department as 
follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the depart- 
ments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 
Music — any combination of eight 
(8) credits, including applied 
music, ensemble, and music 
department courses 
Theatre — any two (2) courses 
from among Theatre 100, 1 10, 
140, 148, 332, 333, or other 
courses with the consent of the 
instructor 
Language — any two (2) courses at 
the intermediate or higher level. 
No student who has had two or 
more years of a given foreign 
language in high school shall be 
admitted to the elementary 
courses in that same language 
for credit, except by written per- 
mission of the chairman of the 
department. 
Natural Science — Chemistry 108, 

115 
Social Science — Psychology 1 10 
and 1 17; Sociology and anthropol- 
ogy — one from among Soc 1 10, 
1 14, 220, 222. 224. 227^. 228. 229. 
331. 334. and 335. 
Physical Education — standard 
requirement as shown on page 5. 

THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental or 
interdisciplinary (established or individ- 
ual) major. Specific course require- 
ments for each major offered by the 
College are listed in the curriculum sec- 
tion of this catalog. Students must earn a 
2.0 or higher grade-point average in 
those courses stipulated as comprising 
the major. (This requirement is not met 
by averaging the grades for all courses 
completed in the major department.) 



Students must declare a major by the 
beginning of their junior year. Depart- 
mental and established interdisciplinary 
majors are declared in the Office of the 
Registrar, whereas individual interdis- 
ciplinary majors must be approved by 
the Committee on Curriculum Develop- 
ment. Students may complete more than 
one major, each of which will be 
recorded on the transcript. Students may 
be removed from major status if they are 
not making satisfactory progress in the 
major. This action is taken by the Dean 
of the College upon the recommenda- 
tion of the department, coordinating 
committee (for established interdiscip- 
linary majors), or Curriculum Develop- 
ment Committee (for individual inter- 
disciplinary majors). The decision of the 
Dean of the College may be appealed to 
the Academic Standing Committee by 
the student involved or the recommend- 
ing department or committee. 

Departmental Majors — Departmental 
majors are available in the following 
areas: 

Accounting 

Art History 

Art Studio 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Languages, and Literatures 

French, German, Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 

Sociology/ Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established Interdisciplinary Majors 

— The following established interdis- 
ciplinary majors include course work in 



two or more departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Mass Communication 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major that is 
unique to their needs and objectives and 
which combines course work in more 
than one department. This major is 
developed in consultation with the stu- 
dent's faculty advisor and with a panel 
of faculty members from each of the 
sponsoring departments. The applica- 
tion is acted upon by the Curriculum 
Development Committee. The major 
normally consists of 10 courses beyond 
those taken to satisfy the distribution 
requirements. Students are expected to 
complete at least six courses at the 
junior or senior level. Examples of indi- 
vidual interdisciplinary majors are 
Racial and Cultural Minorities, Illustra- 
tion in the Print Medium. Environmen- 
tal Law, Advertising, Art/History. Art/ 
Business, Human Behavior, and Images 
of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to 
Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree — 

Through a cooperative program with the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture, Mercerville, New Jersey, 
students may earn a BFA degree in 
sculpture. The major consists of a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
art, elective courses, and an apprentice- 
ship at the Johnson Atelier. 

THE MINOR 

The College awards two kinds of 
minors, departmental and interdisciplin- 
ary, in recognition of concentrated 
course work in an area other than the 
student's major. All minors are subject 
to the following limitations: 

— a minor must include at least 
two courses which are not counted 



in the student's major. 

— a student may receive at most two 
minors. 

— students with two majors may 
receive only one minor; students 
with three majors may not receive 
a minor. 

— students may not receive a minor 
in their major discipline unless 
their major discipline is Art and 
the minor is Art History. (A dis- 
cipline is any course of study in 
which a student can major. Tracks 
within majors are not separate dis- 
ciplines.) 

— a student may not receive a minor 
unless his average in the courses 
which count for his minor is a 
minimum of 2.00. 

— courses taken S/U may not be 
counted toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention to 
minor by signing a form available in the 
Registrar's Office, getting required 
faculty signatures, and returning the 
completed form to the Records Room. 
When students complete a minor, the 
title will be indicated on their official 
transcript. Students must meet the 
requirements for the minor which are in 
effect at the time they declare a minor or 
which are in effect subsequent to that 
time and before they graduate. 

Departmental Minors — Require- 
ments for a departmental minor vary 
from department to department. Stu- 
dents interested in pursuing a depart- 
mental minor should consult that depart- 
ment for its policy regarding minors. 

Departmental minors are available in 
the following areas; 
ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Sculpture 

Painting 
BIOLOGY 
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Marketing 

Finance 



CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 

Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 

SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 

Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis- 
ciplinary minors include coursework in 
two or more departments. Students 
interested in interdisciplinary minors 
should consult the faculty coordinator of 
that minor. Interdisciplinary minors are 
available in the following areas: BIBLI- 
CAL LANGUAGES, CRIMINAL JUS- 
TICE, MASS COMMUNICATION, 
and WOMEN'S STUDIES. 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
direct, personal contact between a stu- 
dent and his or her college instructors 
who care about that student's personal, 
academic, and professional aspirations. 
The student can draw upon their years of 
experience to resolve questions about so- 



cial adjustment, workload, study skills, 
tutoring, and more. Perhaps the member 
of the faculty with the most impact on a 
student is the academic advisor. 

The freshman advisor, whom the stu- 
dent meets at summer orientation, assists 
with course selection by providing accu- 
rate information about requirements and 
programs and with personal adjustment 
by helping the student recognize his or 
her own goals. In addition, the advisor 
will refer students to other campus re- 
sources whenever the need is apparent. 

During the student's sophomore year, 
he or she will choose a major and select 
an advisor from the major department. 
The new advisor, while serving as a re- 
source for the student, can best advise 
that student about course selection and 
career opportunities. 

Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to 
contribute to our students' development 
in yet another way. We insist that stu- 
dents assume full responsibility for their 
decisions and academic progress. By 
doing so. we help to prepare them for the 
harder choices and responsibilities of the 
professional world. 

Also. Lycoming provides special 
advising programs for careers in medi- 
cine, law. and religion. Interested stu- 
dents should register with the appropriate 
advisory committee immediately after 
deciding to enter one of these profes- 
sions. 

Preparation for Educational Profes- 
sions — Lycoming College believes that 
the liberal arts provide the best prepara- 
tion for future teachers, thus all educa- 
tion students complete a liberal arts ma- 
jor in addition to the Lycoming College 
Teacher Education Certificate require- 
ments. Students can be certified in 
elementary education or one or more of 
the following secondary areas: art (K- 
12). biology, chemistry. English. 
French, general science (with biology or 
astronomy/physicsl tracks), German, 
mathematics, music (K-12). physics, so- 
cial studies, and Spanish. All teacher- 
education programs are approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education. 
Pennsylvania certificates are recognized 
in most other states either through recip- 



rocal agreements or by transcript evalua- 
tion. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional 
education for the health professions 
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, podiat- 
ric and veterinary medicine, optometry, 
and pharmacy) is organized around a 
sound foundation in biology, chemistry, 
mathematics, and physics and a wide 
range of subject matter from the humani- 
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At 
least three years of undergraduate study 
is recommended before entry into a pro- 
fessional school; the normal procedure is 
to complete the bachelor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the health 
professions or in an allied health career 
should make their intentions known to 
the admissions office when applying and 
to the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee (HPAC) during their first semes- 
ter. The committee advises students con- 
cerning preparation for and application 
to health-professions schools. All pre- 
health professions students are invited to 
join the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions of the 
nursing program and of the cooperative 
programs in podiatric medicine, 
optometry, and medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in law 
as a profession. Admission to law school 
is not predicated upon a particular major 
or area of study; rather, a student is en- 
couraged to design a course of study ( tra- 
ditional or interdisciplinary major) 
which is of personal interest and signifi- 
cance. While no specific major is recom- 
mended, there are certain skills of par- 
ticular relevance to the pre-law student; 
clear writing, analytical thinking, and 
language comprehension. These skills 
should be developed during the under- 
graduate years. 

Pre-law students should register with 
the Legal Professions Advisory Commit- 
tee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming and 
should join the Pre-Law Society on cam- 
pus. LPAC assists the pre-law student 
through advisement, compilation of re- 



commendations, and dissemination of 
information and materials about law and 
the legal profession. The Pre-Law Socie- 
ty has sponsored films, speakers, and 
field trips, including visits to law school 
campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Committee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and clergy 
to discuss the needs of students who want 
to prepare themselves for the ministry, 
religious education, advanced training in 
religion, or related vocations. Also, it 
may help coordinate internships for stu- 
dents who desire practical experience in 
the parish ministry or related areas. Upon 
entering Lycoming, students should reg- 
ister with TPAC if they plan to investi- 
gate the religious vocations. 

In general, students preparing to 
attend a theological seminary should ex- 
amine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommended 
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a 
major in one of the humanities (English, 
history, languages, literature, philoso- 
phy, religion) or one of the social scien- 
ces (American studies, criminal justice, 
economics, international studies, politic- 
al science, psychology, sociology- 
anthropology), and a variety of electives. 
Students preparing for a career in reli- 
gious education should major in religion 
and elect five or six courses in psycholo- 
gy, education, and sociology. This prog- 
ram of study will qualify students to 
work as an educational assistant or a 
director of religious education after 
graduate study in a theological seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semester 
and register their course selections in the 
Office of the Registrar. Course selection 
is made in consultation with the student's 
faculty advisor in order to insure that the 
course schedule is consistent with Col- 
lege requirements and student goals. Af- 
ter the registration period, any change in 
the student's course schedule must be 



approved by both the faculty advisor and 
Office of the Registrar. Students may not 
receive credit for courses in which they 
are not formally registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appearing 
on the permanent record, and they may 
add any course that is not closed. Stu- 
dents wishing to drop a course between 
the fifth day and the 1 2th week of classes 
must secure a withdrawal form from the 
Office of the Registrar, which is pre- 
sented to the instructor of the course in 
question, who assigns a withdrawal 
grade based on the level of the student's 
performance from the beginning of the 
course to the date of withdrawal. With- 
drawal grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. Students may not 
withdraw from courses after the 12th 
week of a semester and the comparable 
period during the May and summer 
terms. 

In two-credit ( '/: unit) courses meeting 
only during the last half of any semester, 
students may drop/add for a period of 
five days, effective with the mid-term 
date shown on the academic calendar. 
Withdrawal from half-semester courses 
with a withdrawal grade may occur with- 
in six weeks of the beginning of the 
course. It is understood that the period of 
time at the beginning of the semester and 
at the mid-point of the semester will be 
identical, for example, a period of five 
days as indicated above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is orga- 
nized, with few exceptions, on a depart- 
mental basis, most courses are unit 
courses, meaning that each course taken 
is considered to be equivalent to four 
semester hours of credit. Exceptions 
occur in applied music and theatre practi- 
cum courses, which are offered for either 
one-half or one semester hour of credit, 
and in departments that have elected to 
offer certain courses for the equivalent of 
two semester hours of credit. Further, 
independent studies and internships car- 
rying two semester hours of credit may 
be designed. The normal student course 



load is four courses during the fall and 
spring semesters. Students who elect to 
attend the special sessions may enroll in 
one course during the May term and one 
or two courses in the summer tenn. A 
student is considered full time when en- 
rolled for a minimum of three courses 
during the fall or spring semesters, one 
course for the May term . and two courses 
for the summer term. Students may en- 
roll in five courses during the fall and 
during semesters if they are Lycoming 
scholars or were admitted to the Dean's 
List at the end of the previous semester. 
Exceptions may be granted by the Dean 
of the Colelge. Overloads are not permit- 
ted during the May and summer terms 

THE SYSTEM OF GRADING 
AND REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student performance 
in credit courses is indicated by the use 
of traditional letter symbols. These sym- 
bols and their definitions are as follows: 
A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of content 
or skills and demonstration of creative 
and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the stu- 
dent reveals insight and understanding. 
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's work 
has been of average quality and quanti- 
ty. The student has demonstrated basic 
competence in the subject area and may 
enroll in additional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 
passing the course and should not con- 
tinue in the subject area without depart- 
mental advice. 

F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum requirements 
for passing the course. 
1 Incomplete Work — Assigned in 
accordance with the restrictions of 
established academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students shall 
have the option of repeating courses for 
which they already have received a 
passing grade in addition to those which 
they have failed. Credit is received only 



once for the course. Grades will be aver- 
aged. 

S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of A, 
B. C. or D. 

U Falling work, no grade assigned — 
converted from traditional grade of F. 
X Audit — Work as an auditor for 
which no credit is earned. 
W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course early in the term when it 
cannot be determined that the student is 
passing or failing. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying 
quality points by credits and dividing 
the total quality points by the total cred- 
its. A quality point is the unit of mea- 
surement of the quality of work done by 
the student. 





Quality Points 




Earned 


de 


for each semester 




hour 


A 


4.00 


A- 


3.67 


B-h 


3.33 


B 


3.00 


B- 


2.67 


C + 


2.33 


C 


2.00 


c- 


1.67 


D + 


1.33 


D 


1.00 


D- 


0.67 


F 


0.00 



The grade point average for the major 
is calculated in the same manner for the 
courses required for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for 
the cumulative grade point average and 
for the grade point average in the major 
to meet the requirements for graduation. 
You cannot compute your cumulative 
GPA by averaging your semester 
GPA's. 

Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfactory 
grading option is limited as follows (this 
does not apply to Education 005 and 
English 005): 

— students may enroll on an 
S/U basis in no more than one 



10 



course per semester and no more 
than four courses during the 
undergraduate career. 

■ S/U courses completed after 
declaration of the major may not 
be used to satisfy a requirement of 
that major, including courses 
required by the major department 
which are offered by other depart- 
ments. (Instructor-designated 
courses are excepted from this 
limitation.) 

- courses for which a grade of S is 
recorded may not be used toward 
fulfillment of any distribution 
requirement. 

- students may not enroll in English 
6 on an S/U basis. 

■ a course selected on an S/U basis 
which is subsequently withdrawn 
will not count toward the four- 
course limit. 

• instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
limit. 

- S/U grades are not computed in 
the grade point average. 

- students electing the S/U option 
may designate a minimum accep- 
tance letter grade of A or B. If the 
letter grade actually earned by the 
student equals or exceeds this 
minimum, that letter grade is 
entered on the student's permanent 
record and is computed in the 
grade point average. In such a 
case, the course does not count 
toward the four-course limit. If the 
student does not indicate a mini- 
mum acceptable letter grade or if 
the letter grade actually earned is 
lower than the minimum desig- 
nated by the student, the Registrar 
substitutes an S for any passing 
grade (A. A-. B -I- . B. B-. 
C -(- , C - , D -h . D. or D - ) and a 
U for an F grade. 

- students receiving either an S or U 
grade may not be eligible for the 
Dean's List for that semester. 

- students must declare the S/U 
option before the end of the period 



during which courses may be 
added during any given semester, 
half-semester, or term. 

— instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on an 
S/U basis. 

— students electing the S/U option 
are expected to perform the same 
work as those enrolled on a regular 
basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given 
if. for absolutely unavoidable rea- 
sons (usually medical in nature). 
the student has not been able to 
complete the work requisite to the 
course. An incomplete grade must 
be removed within six weeks of 
the next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option 
of repeating courses for which 
they already have received a pass- 
ing grade in addition to those 
which they have failed. Recording 
of grades for all repeated courses 
shall be governed by the following 
conditions: 

— a course may be repeated 
only one time. 

— both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript. 

— credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

— for the purpose of determining the 
student's GPA. the average grade 
received for the two attempts will 
be used as if it were the grade for a 
single course. 

— a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of unsuc- 
cessful attempts. 

ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there is 
value in class attendance for all students. 
Individual instructors have the preroga- 
tive of establishing reasonable absence 
regulations in any course. The student is 
responsible for learning and observing 
these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educational 
records is designed to protect the privacy 
of students against unwarranted intru- 
sions and is consistent with Section 438 
of the General Education Provision Act 
(commonly known as the Family Educa- 
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974. as 
amended). The details of the College 
policy on student records and the proce- 
dures for gaining access to student re- 
cords are contained in the current issue of 
The Pathfinder, which is available in the 
library and the Office of the Dean of the 
College. 

ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of hours 
completed or cumulative grade point 
average falls below the following stan- 
dards: 

Semester Hours Cumulative 

(Full-time) Completed GPA 

1 12 1.66 

2 24 1.85 

3 40 1.90 

4 56 2.00 

5 72 2.00 

6 88 2.00 

7 104 2.00 

8 120 2.00 

In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part 
time or for fewer than the normal four 
courses per term will be expected to com- 
plete an equivalent proportion of their 
program each semester. 

Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— are on probation for two consecu- 
tive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1 .00 or below during any one semester. 
Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 



— can not reasonably complete all re- 
quirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc- 
cessful course attempts (grades of F. U. 
W, and R) except in the case of with- 
drawal for medical or psychological 
reasons. 

The integrity of the academic process of 
the College requires honesty in all phases 
of the instructional program. The Col- 
lege assumes that students are committed 
to the principle of academic honesty. 
Students who fail to honor this commit- 
ment are subject to dismissal . Procedural 
guidelines and rules for the adjudication 
of cases of academic dishonesty are 
printed in The Faculty Handbook and 
The Paihfiner (the student academic 
handbook), copies of which are available 
in the library. 

TRANSFER CREDIT 

A Lycoming College student who wishes 
to satisfy any degree, distribution, major 
or minor requirement with course work 
completed at another institution must se- 
cure permission to study off-campus 
from the department chairperson (of each 
department in which credit will be 
awarded) and approval from the Reg- 
istrar. If a course is approved for transfer 
prior to the first meeting thereof, Lycom- 
ing College guarantees the transfer of 
that course and grade. 

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering fresh- 
men who have completed an advanced 
course while in secondary school and 
who have taken the appropriate adv- 
anced-placement examination of the 
College Entrance Examination Board 
(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre- 
dit and advanced placement at the time of 
admission. A grade of three or above is 
considered satisfactory. Students should 
inform the Registrar's Office and their 
academic advisor immediately when 
advanced placement examinations have 
been taken. 

College Level Examination Prog- 
ram (CLEP) — Students may earn col- 



lege credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th 
percentile or above on the General Ex- 
aminations and the 65th percentile or 
above on approved Subject Examina- 
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent 
of the course requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Although these examina- 
tions may be taken after enrollment, new 
students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the examina- 
tion of their choice during the second 
semester of their senior year so that 
Lycoming will have the test scores avail- 
able for registration advisement for the 
first semester of enrollment. Further in- 
formation about CLEP may be obtained 
through the secondary-school guidance 
office or the Office of Admissions or the 
Registrar at Lycoming College. Students 
should inform the Registrar's Office and 
their academic advisor immediately 
when CLEP examinations have been 
taken. 

ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted to 
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and 
spring semesters if they have completed 
at least 15 credits with other than S/U or 
R grades, and have a minimum grade 
point average of 3.50 for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, or the bache- 
lor of science in nursing degree with hon- 
ors when they have earned the following 
grade point averages based on all courses 
attempted at Lycoming, with a minimum 
of 64 credits (16 units) required for a 
student to be eigible for honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards. Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 
annual Honors Day convocation, the 
Academic Awards banquet, and Com- 
mencement and through election to 
membership in honor societies. 



Societies 

Biology Beta Beta Beta 

Freshmen Men Blue Key 

Freshmen Women Gold Key 

Economics .... Omicron Delta Epsilon 

English Sigma Tau Delta 

General Academic Phi Kappa Phi 

History Phi Alpha Theta 

Nursing Sigma Theta Tau* 

Philosophy Phi Sigma Tau 

Physics Sigma Pi Sigma 

Political Science Pi Sigma Alpha 

Psychology Psi Chi 

Social Science Pi Gamma Mu 

Theatre . . Alpha Psi Omega (Omega Chi ) 
■ charter application filed in Spring 

Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Socien Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan- 
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given 
to the outstanding senior in chemistry 
who plans to enter the profession. 

Accounting Society Service Award — 
The award is given for outstanding ser- 
vice to the Lycoming College Account- 
ing Society. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize — 
The prize, given by the Philadelphia sec- 
tion of the institute, goes to the senior 
major for excellence in chemistry. 

William T. and Ruth S. Askey Music 
Prize — given to a graduating senior who 
is recognized for his/her proficiency as a 
music major. 

Jack C. Buckle Award — The award is 
given annually to a junior male student 
with high moral qualities, who has made 
an unusual contribution to campus life 
through leadership in student activities. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award — 
The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biological 
sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award — The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited outstanding 
academic achievement in chemistry. 



12 



Chieftain Award — The College's most 
prestigious award is given to the senior 
who has contributed most to Lycoming 
through support of school activities; who 
has exhibited outstanding leadership 
qualities: who has worked effectively 
with other members of the College com- 
munity; who has evidenced a good moral 
code; and whose academic rank is above 
the median for the preceding senior 
class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award is given 
to the College choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contribu- 
tions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been oustanding in 
the promotion of College spirit through 
participation in athletics and other activi- 
ties. 

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstanding work in mathema- 
tics. 

Biology Service Award — student who 
has shown good academic work and has 
fostered the ideals of the department by 
willingness to become involved in the 
activities of the department. 

Freshman Biology Award — freshman 
who has obtained the highest overall 
average in Major's Biology Lecture and 
Laboratory Course. 

Diirkheim Award — The award is given 
to the senior sociology/anthropology ma- 
jor who has done outstanding work in the 
field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior who has 
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
school spirit, and participation in school 
activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the out- 
standing senior art major in this field. 



Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the out- 
standing senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — The award is given to the stu- 
dent who has been outstanding as a per- 
former in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 
— The award is given to the student who 
has been outstanding as a technician for 
the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science A ward — 
The award goes to the senior political 
science major who has performed with 
excellence. 

W. Arthur Fans Memorial Prize — Prize 
given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur Faus, 
a former Professor of Philosophy at 
Lycoming College, to the graduating 
senior who has done outstanding work in 
philosophy. 

J.W. Ferree Award — Given in memory 
of the first mathematics professor at 
Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickinson 
Seminary, the award goes to the student 
most active in mathematical sciences. 

Faculty Prize — The prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory 
scholarship and who has been outstand- 
ing in promotion of school spirit through 
participation in school activities. 

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The 
prizes are given to the French, German, 
and Spanish majors who have achieved 
excellence in foreign languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the award 
is given to the senior English major who 
achieves the highest average in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes are 



given to the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 

Dan Giistaf son Award — In memory of a 
former member of the English Depart- 
ment, the award is given to the senior 
English major whose analytical writing 
demonstrates the highest standards of 
literary and critical excellence. 

IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote 
membership in the society for juniors 
who are very active on campus. 

Junior Book Award — The award is 
given to the outstanding junior political 
science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior mathematics major 
with outstanding achievement in the 
field. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, busi- 
ness administration, and economics ma- 
jors who show the greatest proficiency in 
statistics: the mathematics major who 
shows the greatest proficiency in applied 
mathematics; the graduating senior who 
shows the greatest proficiency in compu- 
ter science and operations research; the 
graduating senior business administra- 
tion major with highest grade point aver- 
age; the graduating senior with highest 
average in the class and the graduating 
nursing major with highest grade point 
average. 

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — The 
prize is given to the graduating student 
who has shown outstanding scholarship 
in legal principles. 

The John M. Lindemuth Endowed Prize 
Fund — The John M. Lindemuth En- 
dowed Prize Fund, established in 1986 
by Mr. and Mrs. John M. Lindemuth of 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania, provides 
annual cash awards for varsity football 
players who earn the highest cumulative 
grade point average in their chosen field 
of academic study at Lycoming College. 
This prize is managed in compliance 



13 



with current NCAA regulations concern- 
ing scholastic awards for athletes. 

C. Daniel and Jeanne Little Award — 
Presented in memory of two Lycoming 
alumni, the award is given to the out- 
standing student in public administra- 
tion. 

The Gertrude B. Madden Mass Com- 
munication Award — Established in 
1985 by the students of the Mass Com- 
munication Society, the award is to be 
presented annually to the senior mass 
communication major who, in the judg- 
ment of his or her peers, has best inte- 
grated academic excellence, profession- 
al development in a mass media field and 
contribution to campus media. 

The Makisu Award — The award is given 
for outstanding service to the college 
community, for dedication above and 
beyond the realm of one's obligations to 
the College. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the .senior majors 
in mathematics, biology, chemistry, 
physics, philosophy, and psychology 
who have attained the highest averages. 

Ethel McDonald Pax Christ i Award — 
The award is given for outstanding but 
quiet consistency in the life of faith and 
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy 
personal integrity and humble loving 
compassion expressed in daily life. 

Walter G. Mclver Award — Named after 
Lycoming's former choir director, the 
award is given to the choir member who 
has made outstanding campus contribu- 
tions outside of choir. 

Department of Nursing Award for Cli- 
nical Excellence — outstanding achieve- 
ment in the clinical setting. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub- 
lic Accountants Award — The award is 
given to the senior accounting major who 
has demonstrated high scholastic stand- 
ing and qualities of leadership. 



Pocahontas Award — The award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding female 
athlete. 

Psi Chi Service Award — The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychology 
Department. 

Research and Writing Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the student who 
does the best work in History 45. 

The Professor Logan A. Richmond 
Accounting Prize — is awarded annually 
to a graduating senior who has done out- 
standing work in accounting and demon- 
strated exceptional proficiency in 
writing. 

The Janet A. Rodgers Academic Award 

— established in honor of the founding 
chair of the Department of Nursing, pro- 
vides an annual $100 award to senior 
nursing student who demonstrates ex- 
ceptional academic achievement and has 
been an active participant in health- 
related programs. 

Mary L. Russell Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus of music, 
the award is given for outstanding music- 
al achievement. 

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement in 
calculus, foundations of mathematics, 
algebra, and analysis. 

Nathan A. Scheib Memorial Music Fund 

— In memory of a friend of the College, 
the fund provides financial assistance to 
qualified deserving students for adv- 
anced training in music. 

Senior Management Award — The 
award is given to the senior business ma- 
jor with the best senior project in Busi- 
ness Administration 41. 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 



Service to Lycoming Award 



Spon- 



sored by the Office of Student Services, 
the award is given to students who have 
made outstanding contributions to 
Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — The award 
is given to the senior with outstanding 
achievement in mathematics. 

J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is 
given for superior undergraduate 
achievement and potential for further 
work in psychology. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to the 
graduating student with outstanding 
achievement in economics. 

Tomahawk Award — The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major who 
has done outstanding work in the field. 

Wall Street Journal Awards — Two 
awards are given. One is given to the 
senior business major for excellence in 
the field and service to the College com- 
munity. A second award is given for ex- 
cellence in economics. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award 
is given to the junior athlete who has 
shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The 
scholarship is given to the junior woman 
student who has shown satisfactory scho- 
larship, outstanding school spirit, and 
who is active in campus activities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only to 
exceptionally well-qualified students 
who have a solid background in the area 
of the project and are capable of con- 
siderable self-direction. The prere- 
quisites for registration in an honors 
program are as follows: 

— a faculty member from the depart- 



14 



ment(s) in which the honors project is to 
be undertaken must agree to be the direc- 
tor and must secure departmental 
approval of the project. 

— the director, in consultation with 
the student, must convene a committee 
consisting of two faculty members from 
the department in which the project is to 
be undertaken, one of whom is the direc- 
tor of the project, and one faculty mem- 
ber from each of two other departments 
related to the subject matter of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the applica- 
tion that the project in question is 
academically legitimate and worthy of 
pursuit as an honors project, and that the 
student in question is qualified to pursue 
the project. 

— the project must be approved by the 
Committee on Individual Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical study, or 
creative project. If the end product is a 
creative project, a critical paper analyz- 
ing the techniques and principles em- 
ployed and the nature of the achievement 
represented in the project shall be sub- 
mitted. 

— the student must successfully ex- 
plain and defend the work in a final oral 
examination given by the honors com- 
mittee. 

— the honors committee must certify 
that the student has successfully de- 
fended the project, and that the student's 
achievement is clearly superior to that 
which would ordinarily be required to 
earn a grade of "A" in a regular indepen- 
dent-studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stu- 
dies must certify that the student has 
satisfied all of the conditions mentioned 
above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, honors 
projects are expected to involve indepen- 
dent study in two consecutive unit 



courses. Successful completion of the 
honors project will cause the designation 
of honors in that department to be placed 
upon the permanent record. Acceptable 
theses are deposited in the College lib- 
rary. In the event that the study is not 
completed successfully or is not deemed 
worthy of honors, the student shall be 
re-registered in independent studies and 
given a final grade for the course. 

Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Ex- 
aminations, papers, and other evaluation 
devices are not required of auditors, but 
individual arrangements may be made to 
complete such exercises with the consent 
of the instructor. The option to audit a 
course must be declared during the same 
period (currently five days) at the begin- 
ning of each semester, half-semester, or 
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must 
be completed in the Registrar's Office. 

SPECIAL FEATURES 

Academic Resource Center — The 

Academic Resource Center, located on 
the first floor of Rich Hall, provides a 
variety of services for the campus com- 
munity. Our services are free to all 
Lycoming students. 

The ARC maintains academic and so- 
cial support programs for those with spe- 
cial learning needs. Students meet reg- 
ularly with a specialist in learning disabi- 
lities who works individually with stu- 
dents to help them manage their learning 
processes while fostering independent 
behavior and providing personal advoca- 
cy. Particular strategies include books on 
tape, alternative testing procedures, lec- 
ture taping, notetakers, and individual- 
ized instruction in study and time man- 
agement skills. 

Other services available through the 
ARC include study and grammar skills 
workshops. Workshop topics include 
time management, stress management, 
note-taking from lectures and textbooks, 
word processing for beginners, proof- 
reading techniques, fragments, and com- 
ma use. In addition, the ARC offers the 



Paper File — a file of graded essays 
maintained by course, a Documentation 
Style Manual — a useful reference 
source for writing parenthetical and bib- 
liographic entries. The Writing Room, a 
quiet place for writers to work, and self- 
paced computer assisted instructional 
programs in typing and speed reading 
and comprehension. 

Developmental Program — The de- 
velopmental program is provided for stu- 
dents who are identified as being able to 
benefit from specialized classroom in- 
struction in college-level reading and 
writing skills. Students develop these 
basic skills in the context of the regular 
academic curriculum. Both reading and 
writing skills are taught as part of an 
integrated curriculum consisting of a 
one-half unit course in developmental 
writing (ENGLISH 005) and a one-half 
unit course in developmental reading and 
study skills (EDUCATION 005). These 
courses are coordinated with one of the 
following areas: economics, history, 
political science, psychology, or sociol- 
ogy. Math skills are taught in a one-half 
unit algebra course (mathematics 005) 
which is conducted on an individualized 
basis with tutorial support. 

Independent Studies — Independent 
studies are available to any qualified stu- 
dent who wishes to engage in and receive 
academic credit for any academically 
legitimate course of study for which he or 
she could not otherwise receive credit. It 
may be pursued at any level (introduc- 
tory, intermediate, or advanced) and in 
any department, whether or not the stu- 
dent is a major in that department. Stu- 
dies projects which duplicate catalog 
courses are sometimes possible, and are 
subject to the same provisions which 
apply to all studies projects. In order for a 
student to be registered in an indepen- 
dent-study course, the following condi- 
tions must be satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise the pro- 
ject and must certify by signing the ap- 
plication form that the project is 
academically legitimate and involves an 
amount of work appropriate for the 



15 



amount of academic credit requested, 
and that the student in question is qual- 
ified to pursue the project. 

— the studies project must be 
approved by the chairman of the depart- 
ment in which the studies project is to be 
undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by the 
instructor and by the chairman of the 
appropriate department, the studies pro- 
ject must be approved by the Committee 
on Individual Studies. 

In addition, participation in indepen- 
dent-studies projects, with the exception 
of those which duplicate catalog courses, 
is subject to the following; 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies project 
during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies projects 
during their academic careers at Lycom- 
ing College. 

As with other academic policies, any 
exceptions to these two rules must be 
approved by the Academic Standing 
Committee. 

Internship Program — An in- 
ternship is a course jointly sponsored by 
the College and a public or private agen- 
cy or subdivision of the Collge in which a 
student is enabled to earn college credit 
by participating in some active capacity 
as an assistant, aide, or apprentice. At 
least one-half of the effort expended by 
the intern should consist of academic 
work related to agency situations. The 
objectives of the internship program are 

( 1 ) to further the development of a cen- 
tral core of values, awarenesses, 
strategies, skills, and information 
through experiences outside the clas- 
sroom or other campus situations, and 

(2) to facilitate the integration of theory 
and practice by encouraging students to 
relate their on-campus academic experi- 
ences more directly to society in general 
and to possible career and other post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in good 
academic standing may petition the 



Committee on Individual Studies for 
approval to serve as an intern. A max- 
imum of 1 6 credits can be earned through 
the internship program. Guidelines for 
program development, assignment of 
tasks and academic requirements, such 
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc., 
are established in consultation with a 
faculty director at Lycoming and an 
agency supervisor at the place of in- 
ternship. 

Students with diverse majors have par- 
ticipated in a wide variety of internships, 
including those with the AUenwood 
Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming County 
Commissioners Office, Department of 
Environmental Resources, Head Start, 
Lycoming County Historical Society, 
business and accounting firms, law 
offices, hospitals, social service agen- 
cies, banks, and Congressional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary .session designed to pro- 
vide students with courses listed in the 
catalog and experimental and special 
courses that are not normally available 
during the fall and spring semesters and 
summer term. Some courses are offered 
on campus; others involve travel. A 
number offer interdisciplinary credit. 
Illustrations of the types of courses 
offered during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archaelo- 
gical expeditions to the Middle East; 
Anthropological expeditions to study tri- 
cultural communities in New Mexico; 
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary 
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America 
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New 
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field 
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Wri- 
ter's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro- 
cesses, Collective Bargaining, Aquatic 
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy 
Alternatives, White Collar Crime, Las- 
ers and their Applications, Selected 
Short Story Writers and their Works, 
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction, 
Administrative and Organizational Be- 
havior of Police, Plant and Greenhouse 
Management, and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 



term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 20 
percent of the student body enrolling. In 
addition to the courses themselves, 
attractions include small and informal 
classes and reduced tuition rates. 

Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at Lycom- 
ing College may. if space permits, regis- 
ter for credit or audit courses on either a 
part-time or full-time basis. Students 
who register for one or two courses are 
considered to be enrolled part time; stu- 
dents who register for three or four 
courses are considered to be enrolled full 
time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an applica- 
tion form in the Admissions Office, pay a 
one-time application fee of $20, and pay 
the tuition rate in effect at the time of 
each enrollment. After a non-degree stu- 
dent has attempted four courses, the 
Dean of the College reserves the right to 
grant or deny permission to continue to 
register in this category. 

All non-degree students are subject to 
the general laws and regulations of the 
College as stated in the College Catalog 
and the Student Handbook. The College 
reserves the right to deny permission to 
register to individuals who do not meet 
the standards of the College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must reapp- 
ly (with no application fee) and satisfy all 
conditions for admission and registration 
in effect at the time of application for 
degree status. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under au- 
spices of approved universities and agen- 
cies. While study abroad is particularly 
attractive to students majoring in foreign 
languages and literatures, this opportun- 
ity is open to all students in good 
academic standing. Mastery of a foreign 
language is desirable but not required in 
all programs. Dr. Richard Barker, assis- 
tant professor of foreign languages and 
literatures, serves as coordinator for the 
Study Abroad Program. Interested stu- 
dents may contact him about opportuni- 



16 



ties available and procedural questions. 

Teacher Intern Program — The pur- 
pKJse of the teacher intern program is to 
provide individuals who have completed 
a baccalaureate degree with the oppor- 
tunity to become certified teachers 
through on-the-job training. Interns can 
earn a Lycoming College Teacher 
Education Certificate and be certified by 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in 
elementary education or one or more of 
the following secondary areas; art, biolo- 
gy, chemistry, English, French, general 
science (with biology or astronomy/phy- 
sics tracks), German, mathematics, 
music, physics, social studies, and 
Spanish. 

Interested individuals should file a for- 
mal application with the Education De- 
partment for admission to the Intern 
Program. Upon completion of the ap- 
plication process, interns receive a letter 
of Intern Candidacy from the Pennsylva- 
nia Department of Education which the 
candidate then uses to apply for a 
teaching position. Necessary profession- 
al coursework can be completed prior to 
the teaching experience or coordinated 
with the teaching experience when indi- 
viduals obtain teaching positions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 

COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several 
cooperative programs to provide stu- 
dents with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in 
selected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, 
academies, and hospitals. Although 
thorough advisement and curricular 
planning are provided for each of the 
cooperative programs, admission to 
Lycoming and registration in the prog- 
ram of choice do not guarantee admis- 
sion to the cooperating institution. The 
prerogative of admitting students to the 
cooperative aspect of the program rests 



with the cooperating institution. Stu- 
dents who are interested in a cooperative 
program should contact the coordinator 
during the first week of the first semester 
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is 
necessary to plan their course programs 
in a manner that will insure completion 
of required courses according to the 
schedule stipulated for the program. All 
cooperative programs require special 
coordination of course scheduling at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining the 
advantages of a liberal-arts education 
and the technical training of an engineer- 
ing curriculum, this program is offered in 
conjunction with The Pennsylvania State 
University. Students complete three 
years of study at Lycoming and two years 
at the cooperating university. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the first year of 
engineering studies, Lycoming awards 
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu- 
dents successfully complete the second 
year of engineering studies, the cooper- 
ating university awards the bachelor of 
science degree in engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in phy- 
sics, mathematics, and chemistry. The 
Pennsylvania State University offers 
aerospace, agricultural, chemical, civil, 
electrical, engineering science, environ- 
mental, industrial, mechanical, and nuc- 
lear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies 

— Lycoming College offers a coopera- 
tive program with Duke University in 
environmental management and fore- 
stry. Qualified students can earn the 
bachelor's and master's degrees in five 
years, spending three years at Lycoming 
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming 
distribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year at 
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded 
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro- 
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or 
Master of Environmental Management 
to qualified candidates at the end of the 
second year. 
The major program emphases at Duke 



are Forest Resource Management, Re- 
source Economics and Policy, and Re- 
source Ecology. The program is flexible 
enough, however, to accommodate a 
variety of individual designs. An under- 
graduate major in one of the natural sci- 
ences, social sciences, or business may 
provide good preparation for the prog- 
rams at Duke, but a student with any 
undergraduate concentration will be con- 
sidered for admission. All students need 
at least two courses each in biology, 
mathematics, and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke in 
July after their junior year at Lycoming 
with a one-month session of field work in 
natural resource measurements. They 
must complete a total of 48 units which 
generally take four semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete the 
bachelor's degree before undertaking 
graduate study at Duke. The master's 
degree requirements for these students 
are the same as for those students enter- 
ing after the junior year, but the 48-unit 
requirement may be reduced for com- 
pleted relevant undergraduate work of 
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions 
are determined individually and consider 
the student's educational background 
and objectives. 

Medical Technology — Students de- 
siring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical internship 
at any American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital, or they may com- 
plete the cooperative program. Students 
electing the cooperative program nor- 
mally study for three years at Lycoming, 
during which time they complete 24 unit 
courses, including the College distribu- 
tion requirements, a major, and require- 
ments of the National Accrediting Agen- 
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences 
(NAACLS). The current requirements of 
the NAACLS are: four courses in che- 
mistry (one of which must be either orga- 
nic or bio-chemistry); four courses in 
biology (including courses in microbiol- 
ogy and immunology), and one course in 
mathemtics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 



17 



modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 
224) and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 221) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 226). and 
either Animal Physiology (Biology 223) 
or Cell Physiology (Biology 335). The 
cooperative program requires successful 
completion of a one-year internship at an 
American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affili- 
ated with the following accredited hos- 
pitals: Divine Providence, Rolling Hill. 
Robert Packer, Lancaster, and Abing- 
ton. Students in the cooperative program 
receive credit at Lycoming for each of 
eight unit courses in biology and chemis- 
try successfullly completed during the 
clinical internship. Successful comple- 
tion of the Registry Examination is not 
considered a graduation requirement at 
Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical internship 
for one year after graduation from 
Lycoming must complete all of the re- 
quirements of the cooperative program, 
but are not eligible for the biology major 
exemptions indicated above. Upon gra- 
duation, such students may apply for 
admission to a clinical program at any 
hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a career 
in optometry may qualify for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry after only three years at 
Lycoming College. After four years at 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry a 
student will earn a Doctor of Optometry 
degree. Selection of candidates for the 
professional segment of the program is 
completed by the admissions committee 
of the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry during the student's third 
year at Lycoming. (This is one of two 
routes that students may choose. Any 
student, of course, may follow the regu- 
lar application procedures for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry or another college of 
optometry to matriculate following com- 
pletion of his or her baccalaureate prog- 



ram.) During the three years at Lycom- 
ing College, the student will complete 24 
unit courses, including all distribution 
requirements, and will prepare for his or 
her professional training by obtaining a 
solid foundation in biology, chemistry, 
physics, and mathematics. During the 
first year of study at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry, the student will 
take 39 semester hours of basic science 
courses in addition to introductions to 
optometry and health care. Successful 
completion of the first year of profes- 
sional training will complete the course 
requirements for the A.B. degree at 
Lycoming College. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy the 
requirements of Lycoming College and 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry. 
Such students are allowed to complete a 
modified biology major which will ex- 
empt them from two biology courses: 
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Scien- 
ces (Biology 225). (This modified major 
requires the successful completion of the 
initial year at the Pennsylvania College 
of Optometry.) Students desiring other 
majors must coordinate their plans with 
the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee in order to insure that they have 
satisfied all requirements. 

The Philadelphia Urban Semester — 

A full semester liberal arts program for 
professional development and field study 
is now available to Lycoming students. 
The program components are: field 
placement; City Seminar: evening semi- 
nars; and living and learning in the city. 
The program is open to students major- 
ing in any discipline or program. The 
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon- 
sored and administered by the Great 
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion, 
Antioch, Denison. De Pauw, Earlham, 
Hope, Kalamazoo, Kenyon, Oberlin, 
Ohio Wesleyan. Wabash, Wooster). 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 
NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 



Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to a 
college of podiatric medicine upon com- 
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or 
through the Accelerated Podiatric 
Medical Education-Curriculum Program 
(APMEC). The latter program provides 
an opportunity for students to qualify for 
admission to the Pennsylvania College of 
Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio 
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) 
after three years of study at Lycoming. 
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 24 
unit courses, including the distribution 
program and a basic foundation in biolo- 
gy, chemistry, physics, and mathema- 
tics. During the first year of studyt at 
PCPM or OCPM, students must success- 
fully complete a program of basic scien- 
ce courses and an introduction to podiat- 
ry. Successful completion of the first 
year of professional training will contri- 
bute toward the fulfillment of the course 
requirements for the bachelor of arts de- 
gree at Lycoming. 

Most students in the cooperative prog- 
ram will major in biology; if so, they will 
be allowed to complete a modified major 
which will exempt them from two biolo- 
gy courses: Ecology (Biology 224) and 
Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at PCPM or 
OCPM). 

Students interested in a career in 
podiatric medicine should indicate their 
intentions to the Health Professions 
Advisory Committee. 

U.S. Army Reserve Officers Train- 
ing Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) — The 

program provides an opportunity for 
Lycoming students to enroll in R.O.T.C. 
Lycoming notes enrollment in and suc- 
cessful completion of the program on 
student transcripts. Military Science is a 
four-year program divided into a basic 
course given during the freshman and 
sophomore years and an advanced course 
given during the junior and senior years. 
Students who have not completed the 
basic course may qualify for the adv- 
anced course by completing summer 
camp between the sophomore and junior 



18 



years. Students enrolled in the advanced 
course receive an annual stipend of 
$1 ,000. One course each in written com- 
munication, human behavior and milit- 
ary history will fulfill the professional 
military education requirements. 
R.O.T.C. scholarship cadets must also 
complete one semester of a foreign lan- 
guage. 

Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced summer 
camp between the junior and senior years 
will qualify for a commission as a 
Second Lieutenant in the United States 
Army upon graduation, and will incur a 
service obligation in the active .Army or 
Army Reserves. The only expense to the 
student for this program is the $75 uni- 
form adeposit, which is refundable, less 
costs. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical Insti- 
tute of Sculpture in Mercerville, New 
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculpture. 
It uses a classical apprenticeship 
approach as its teaching method. This 
ancient method of teaching is combined 
at Johnson with the most modem and 
technically advanced foundry and fabri- 
cating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a synthesis 
program that interrelates the student ex- 
perience at both institutions. This is 
achieved by having the student rotate be- 
tween Lycoming and the atelier so that 
each form of education is preparation for 
the other. Lycoming offers a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
the Art Department, and elective course 
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight 
course units of college credit to the stu- 
dent for having successfully completed 
one of the apprenticeship programs at the 
Johnson Atelier. 

All work completed by the student at 
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore 
year will be applicable to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in art should the 
student decide to withdraw from the BFA 
program. If the student should withdraw 
from the cooperative program prior to 
completing the apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier, Lycoming will give up 
to four units of credit or one semester's 



work for the internship. If, however, the 
student completes more work at the ate- 
lier than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree; it will only be used as part of the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then 
only if the course at the atelier is com- 
pleted. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be in- 
volved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, dur- 
ing the four years it will take to complete 
the degree. (See Art Department listing 
for specific program.) 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for participa- 
tion in specialized programs and courses 
not available at Lycoming. Other mem- 
bers of the program are Bucknell and 
Susquehanna Universities, the Williams- 
port Area Community College, and 
Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, and Man- 
sfield Universities. Students other than 
freshmen enroll full or part time for cre- 
dit, normally for one semester or term, at 
any participating institution in selected 
courses. Students in the program remain 
fully enrolled as degree candidates at 
their home institutions. A special oppor- 
tunity within the program is the cross- 
registration arrangement with the Wil- 
liamsport Area Community College, 
whereby students may enroll for less than 
a full-time course load while remaining 
enrolled in courses at Lycoming. 

Student Teaching Abroad — Lycom- 
ing College has estabished a cooperation 
program with Moorhead State University 
whereby teacher education students may 
do all or part of their student teaching in a 
foreign country. 

This program offers exceptional stu- 
dents the opportunity to student teach in 
nearly any country in the world. Students 
are placed in independent international 
schools where English is the instruction- 
al language. An effort is made to assign 
students in geographical areas that will 
enrich their backgrounds, serve their 
special interests and expand their cultural 



horizons. 

Washington, United Nations and 
London Semester and Capitol Semes- 
ter Internship Program — With the 
consent of the Department of Political 
Science, selected students are permitted 
to study in Washington, D.C., at The 
American University for one semester. 
They may choose from seven different 
programs: Washington Semester, Urban 
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, In- 
ternational Development Semester. Eco- 
nomic Policy Semester, Science and 
Technology Semester, American Studies 
Semester. 

With the consent of either the Depart- 
ment of History or Political Science, 
selected students may enroll at Drew 
University in Madison, New Jersey, in 
the United Nations Semester, which is 
designed to provide a first-hand ac- 
quaintance with the world organization. 
Students with special interests in world 
history, international relations, law, and 
politics are eligible to participate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students partici- 
pate with the consent of either the De- 
partments of History or Political Sci- 
ence. 

The Capitol Semester Internship Prog- 
ram is available to eligible students on a 
competitive basis. The program is co- 
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of 
Administration and Department of 
Education. Paid Internships are available 
to students in most majors. Interested 
students should contact the Career De- 
velopment Center for additional in- 
formation. 

THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Prog- 
ram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of highly 
motivated students of superior intellec- 
tual ability. The Lycoming Scholar satis- 
fies the general distribution require- 
ments, but on a more exacting level and 
with more challenging courses than the 
average student. Lycoming Scholars also 



19 



participate in special courses and semi- 
nars and in serious independent study 
culminating in a senior project super- 
vised by their major department. 

Students are admitted to the program 
by invitation of the Scholar Council, the 
group which oversees the program. The 
council consists of a Director and four 
other faculty selected by the Dean of the 
College, and four students elected by 
current scholars. The guidelines gov- 
erning selection of new scholars are 
flexible; academic excellence, intellec- 
tual curiosity, and creativity are all taken 
into account. Students who desire to par- 
ticipate in the Scholar Program but are 
not invited may petition the Scholar 
Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
Students dropping below this average 
will be placed on Scholar probation until 
their average improves, or they are asked 
to leave the program. To graduate as a 
Scholar, a student must have at least a 
3.0 cumulative average. Scholars must 
take the First Year Scholar Seminar dur- 
ing their first semester in the program 
and the Senior Scholar Seminar during 
their last year in residence at Lycoming. 
In addition, the following distribution re- 
quirements must be met. (Slightly mod- 
ified requirements exist for students in 
the cooperative programs; a list of these 
requirements can be obtained from the 
Scholar Council.) 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in AB 
and BFA Programs. 

A. English. Scholars must complete 
English 106 and one literature course 
numbered 200 or higher. The Scholar 
Council strongly recommends that scho- 
lars enroll in the honors section of En- 
glish 106 if scheduling permits. English 
106 must be taken during the freshman 
year. 

B. Foreign Language/Mathematical 
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the re- 
quirement in either language or mathe- 
matical sciences. Language: Scholars 
must complete two courses numbered 
1 1 1 or higher (excluding courses taught 



in English). Mcithematkal Sciences: The 
mathematical placement test determines 
whether a Scholar must take two or three 
courses for distribution. At least one 
course must be selected from Mathema- 
tics 116, 128, 130, or 214. Only one 
computer science course may be used to 
fulfill the mathematical sciences require- 
ment. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either of 
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses 
numbered 22 1 or higher. Religion: Two 
courses numbered 222 or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the 
requirement in one of four areas. Art: 
Two options are available in art. Either 
two courses from Art 222, 223, 331, 
332, 333, 334, 335 (Art History), or two 
courses from Art 1 1 1 , 1 15, 220, and 225 
(Studio Art). Music: The equivalent of 
two units of credit from Music 117, 167. 
168. 169. 330 or higher. Theatre: Two 
courses from Theatre 140 or higher, ex- 
cluding Theatre 148. Literature: Two 
literature courses from English 220 or 
higher. Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures 225, or French, German, or Span- 
ish 323 or higher. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy I Physics: Two courses 
numbered 1 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two 
courses numbered 1 10 or higher. Che- 
mistry: Two courses numbered 110 or 
higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 1 10 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be numbered 
200 or higher. Political Science: Two 
courses numbered 1 16 or higher. 
Psychology: Two courses including 
Psychology 110 and one course num- 
bered 224 or higher (excluding Psychol- 
ogy 338). Sociology I Anthropology : Two 
courses from Sociology 110, 220, 224, 
226, 227, 229, 300 or higher. 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in BSN Program 

A. English. Same as for BA and BFA 
degrees. 



B. Mathematical Science. Same as for 
BA and BFA degrees. (Note that the 
nursing major requires Mathematics 103 
and one from Computer Science 108 
125, or Mathematics 214). 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak- 
ing Philosophy 219 and Religion 120 
provided that in each course the student 
write an additional paper which must re- 
ceive a grade of B or better. 

D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for 
BA and BFA scholars. 

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 
1 13, Biology 1 14, Biology 226 (required 
for the major). 

F. History/Social Science. Met by 
Psychology 110, Psychology 117, (re- 
quired for the major) and one course in 
Sociology 300 or higher. (This sociology 
course may be taken in lieu of the intro- 
ductory guided elective in Sociology for 
the BSN.) 

All Scholar Students must complete 
the following: 

G. Physical Education. Scholars must 
satisfy the same physical education re- 
quirements stipulated by the College for 
all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition to 
completing the distribution require- 
ments. Scholars will be required to com- 
plete four upper-level courses (numbered 
300 and above) chosen from a list of 
"designated" courses selected and main- 
tained by the Scholar Council. A scholar 
may use no more than two such desig- 
nated courses from any one department 
to satisfy this requirement. Normally. 
Scholars will not begin taking designated 
courses until their sophomore year. 

\. Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been approved 
in advance by the Independent Studies 
Committee and the Scholar Council. 
This project must be presented orally as 
part of the Senior Scholar Seminar and be 
accepted by the Scholar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major and 
32 units, exclusive of the First Year and 
Senior Scholar Seminars. 

K. In the case of transfer students and 



20 



those who seek to enter the program after 
their freshman year and in other cases 
deemed by the Scholar Council to in- 
volve special or extraordinary circumst- 
ances, the Council shall make adjust- 
ments to the scholar distribution require- 
ments provided that in all cases such ex- 
ceptions and adjustments would still 
satisfy the regular College distribution 
requirements. 





22 



Curriculum 



Numbers 001-049 Developmental 

courses 

Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses 

and Freshman level courses 

Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses 

and Sophomore level courses 

Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses 

and Junior level courses 

Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and 

Senior level courses 

Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue 

courses offered on a limited basis 

Numbers 160-169 Applied Music 

Theatre Practicums and other fractional 

credit courses 

Numbers 470-479 Internships 

Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study 

Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for 

Departmental Honors 
*N = course level 1 , 2, 3, or 4 as deter- 
mined by department 
Courses not in sequence are listed separ- 
ately, as: 

Drawing Art 1 1 1 

Color Theory Art 212 

Courses which imply a sequence are in- 
dicated with a dash between, meaning 
that the first semester must be taken prior 
to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 111-112 

All students have the right of access to all 
courses. 

ACCOUNTING 



Associate Professor: Kuhns 
Assistant Professor: Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major is 
to help prepare the student for a career 
within the accounting profession. The 
major has two tracks. Track I is designed 
for students whose primary interests lie 
in the financial area or public accounting 
and provides preparation for the Certi- 
fied Public Accountant Examination; 
Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in management accounting and 
provides preparation for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination. 

Track I — Financial Accounting re- 



quires: Accounting 110, 220-221, 330, 

440. 441, 443. 445, Mathematics 103, 
Computer Science 108. and one unit to 
be selected from Accounting 225, 226. 
331, 442, 446, 447, and 448 or In- 
ternship. Business 110 may be substi- 
tuted for Accounting 1 10 if a student 
changes majors. Duplicate credit will 
not be granted. 

Students seeking entry into the public 
accounting field are advised to investi- 
gate the professional requirements for 
certification in the state in which they 
intend to practice so that they may meet 
all educational requirements prior to gra- 
duation. All Track I majors are advised 
to enroll in Economics 110 and 111, 
Business 335, 336, and 338, and one of 
the following: Business 340, Economics 

220, or 337. 

Track II — Management Accounting re- 
quires: Accounting 110, 220, 330-331. 
444, and 470 or 480; Mathematics 103; 
Computer Science 108; and Business 
338, 339, and 440. All Track 11 majors 
are advised to enroll in Economics 1 10 
and 1 1 1 and Business 335 and 336. Stu- 
dents planning to sit for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination 
are advised to enroll in Accounting 440, 

441 , 442, and 443. Business 110 may be 
substituted for Accounting 110 if a stu- 
dent changes majors. Duplicate credit 
will not be granted. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of Accounting. The following, 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Financial Accounting: Accounting 
110, 220, 221, 443, 447 and any other 
accounting course or independent study. 
A minor in Managerial Accounting re- 
quires the completion of Accounting 
1 10, 220, 330-331 and 444. To obtain a 
minor in Federal Income Tax, a student 
must complete Accounting 1 10, 220- 

221, 441, and 442. 

110 ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, clas- 
sifying, summarizing, and interpreting the 
basic business transaction. Problems of clas- 
sification and interpretation of accounts and 
preparation of financial statements are stu- 
died. Not open to students who have re- 



ceived credit for Business 110. Prere- 
quisite: Second-semester freshman or con- 
sent of instructor, 

220-221 INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 110. 

225 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial state- 
ments as an aid to decision making The 
theme of the course is understanding the 
financial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of 
value to all who need a thorough understand- 
ing of the uses to which financial statements 
are put as well as to those who must know 
how to use them intelligently and effectively. 
This includes accountants, security analysts, 
lending officers, credit analysts, managers, 
and all others who make decisions on the 
basis of financial data. Prerequisite: 
Accounting HO or Business 1 10. 

226 GOVERNMENT AND 
FUND ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce account- 
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Muni- 
cipal accounting and reporting are studied. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or Business 
I/O. One-half unit of credit. 

-^^0-3-^1 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, and 
standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgetary theory to decision 
making in the area of make or buy. expansion 
of production and sales, and accounting for 
control are dealt with. Prerequisites: 
Accounting 220 and Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

440 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and re- 
ports. The goal of the course is to emphasize 
concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environment 
of auditing. Special attention is given to the 
public accounting profession, studying au- 
diting standards, professional ethics, the leg- 
al liability inherent in the attest function, the 
study and evaluation of internal control, the 
nature of evidence . the growing use of statis- 
tical sampling, the impact of electronic data 
processing, and the basic approach to plan- 



23 



ning an audit. Finally, various audit reports 
expressing independent expert opinions on 
the fairness of financial statements are stu- 
died. Prerequisites: Accounting 221. 
Mathematics 447. 103. and Computer Scien- 
ce 108. 

44 1 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods. 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through delcaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of lax 
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

AAl FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An exten- 
sive series of problems is considered, and 
effective tax planning is emphasized. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 441 . 

443 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

Certain areas of advanced accounting theory, 
including business conibin.itions and con- 
solidated financial statements. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221. One-half unit of credit. 

444 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization General 
systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, performance 
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and 
budgets, and marketing, production and fi- 
nance models for control purposes. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting JJI or consent of in- 
structor. 

443 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and the 
auditors report written THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS WHO HAVE 
EITHER COMPLETED OR ARE ENROL- 
LED IN ACCOUNTING 440. One-half unit 
of credit. Grade will be recorded as "S" or 
"U". 

446 SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS 
AND FASB STANDARDS 
A seminar course for accounting majors with 
library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical opin- 
ions of the Accounting Principles Board and 
standards of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board. One term paper. Possible trip to 
New York City to attend a public hearing of 
the Financial Accounting Standards Board. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 1 10. Ma\ term. 



447 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch 
accounting, bankruptcy and reorganization, 
estates and trusts, government entities, and 
non-profit organizations. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221. One-half unit of credit. 

448 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS 
FOR CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice sec- 
tions of Past CPA. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solutiori, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of those 
interested in public accounting and prepara- 
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's 
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 330 
or consent of instructor. One-half unit of 
credit. Grade will he recorded as "S" or 
"U". 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off cam- 
pus under the supervision of a public or pri- 
vate accountant. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in 
accounting are: computer program to gener- 
ate financial statements, educational core for 
public accountants, inventory control, and 
church taxation 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The accounting-mathematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
offer, within a liberal-arts framework, 
courses which will aid in constructing 
mathematical models for business deci- 
sion making. Students obtain the neces- 
sary substantial background in both 
mathematical sciences and accounting. 
Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 110, 220-221, 330-331, 
441, 442. In mathematical sciences re- 
quired courses are: Computer Science 
125 and 321 and Mathematics 1 12, 128, 
129, 338 and either 103 or 332. Recom- 
mended courses include: Mathematics 



130. 238, 333; Business 223, 335, 336. 
338, 339; Computer Science 246; Eco- 
nomics 110, III; Psychology 224, 225; 
and Sociology-Anthropology 1 10. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students to 
the complexities underlying the develop- 
ment of America and its contemporary 
life. Thirteen courses are included. 

FOUR CORE REQUIREMENTS — 
The primary integrating units of the ma- 
jor, these courses, some team-taught, 
will encourage students to consider ideas 
from different points of view and help 
them to correlate information and 
methods from various disciplines: 

1 . America As a Civilization: American 
Studies 200 (First semester of major 
study) 

2. American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature: American Studies 220 

3. Research and Methodology: History 
449 or Sociology/Anthro 447 (junior 
or senior year) 

4. Internship or Independent Study 
(Junior or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six 
courses in one option and three in the 
other are needed. Six primary concentra- 
tion-option courses in American Arts or 
American Society build around the in- 
sights gained in the core courses. They 
focus particular attention on areas most 
germane to academic and vocational in- 
terests. The three additional courses 
from the other option give further 
breadth to an understanding of America. 
Students also will be encouraged to take 
elective courses relating to other cul- 
tures. 

Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator. 



24 



American Arts Concentration Option 

Art 332 — American Art of the 20th Century 
English 222 — American Literature I 
English 223 — American Literature II 
Music 118 — American Music I 
Music 1 19 — American Music II 
Theatre Studies — American Theatre 

American Society 
Concentration Option 

Economics 224 — Urban Problems 

History 442 — U.S. Social and Intellectual History 

to 1877 

History 443 — US. Social and Intellectual History 

since 1877 

Political Science 33 1 — Civil Rights and Liberties 

Political Science 335 — Law and Society 

Sociology 334 — Racial and Cultural Minorities 



200 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural. 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civlization with special attention 
to the interrelationships between these va- 
rious orientations. May be taken for either 
one-half unit (Section 200A) or full unit 
(Section 200B); declared majors and 
prospective majors should take the full-unit 
course, 200B. Alternate years 

220 AMERICAN TRADITION IN 
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE 
The relationship of the arts and literature to 
the various historical periods of American 
life. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP 
N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 



ART 



Professor: Shipley 
Associate Professor: Bogle 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Golahny 
Part-Time Instructor: Hanics 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier: 

Van Tongeren. Barrie, Lash, Pitynski 
The Art Department offers two majors 
in the B.A. Degree (Studio Art and Art 
History) and a second degree program, a 
B.F.A. Degree in Sculpture. 

The B.A. Degree — Studio Art 

To complete a Bachelor of Arts 



degree with a major in studio art, the 
student must complete the seven-course 
foundation program, the requirements 
for an area of specialization and partici- 
pate in senior exhibition. 

Foundation Program 

Art 1 1 1 Drawing I 

Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

Art 116 Figure Modeling 

Art 212 Color Theory 

Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-history 

Through the Middle Ages 
Art 223 Survey of Art: From the 

Renianssance Through the Modem Age 
Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Areas of Specialization 

I. Painting 

Art 220 Painting I 

Art 221 Drawing II 

Art 330 Painting II 

Art 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 
300 or above. 

II. Printmaking 

Art 221 Drawing II 

Art 228 Printmaking I 

Art 338 Printmaking II 

Art 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 
300 or above. 

III. Sculpture 

Art 225 Sculpture I 

Art 226 Figure Modeling II 

Art 335 Sculpture II 

Art 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses numbered 
300 and above. 

IV. Commercial Design 

Art 22 1 Drawing II 

Art 237 Photography II 

Art 442 Special Projects with 

Commercial Design 
GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 
GCO 521 Process Camera 

A student is encouraged to take 
the following courses: Internship 



(Art 470-479), Advertising (Busi- 
ness 332), Writing for Special 
Audiences (English 216). Introduc- 
tion to Mass Communication (Mass 
Comm 110), Social Psychology 
(Psy 224). 

V. Generalist Art Major to be 

taken by those students who are 
seeking teaching certification in 
Art): 
Art 1 19 Ceramics I 

Art 220 Painting 1 

Art 225 Sculpture I 

Art 228 Printmaking 1 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 300 or above. In addition to 
Art Department courses, under the 
generalist major, the student must 
complete the art certification pro- 
gram in the Education Department. 

The B.A. Degree — Art History 

To complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art history, a student 
must take courses in art history, studio 
art, and history and/or religion. A stu- 
dent majoring in art history is advised to 
take a foreign language. 

Required of all students: 
Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-History 
Through the Middle Ages 
Art 223 Survey of Art: From 

Renaissance Through the Modem Age 
Art 447 Art History Research 

Choose four of the following: 
Art 33 1 20th Century European Art 
Art 332 American Art of the 20th 

Century 
Art 333 19th Century European 

and American Art 
Art 334 Art of the Renaissance 

Art 336 Art of the Baroque 

Art 339 Women in Art 

Choose two of the following: 
Art 1 1 1 Drawing I 

Art 115 Two-dimensional Design 

Art 1 16 Figure Modeling I 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Choose two of the following: 

History 210 Ancient History 



25 



History 212 Medieval Europe and its 

Neighbors 
History 318 History of Renaissance 

Thought 
Religion 1 13 Old Testament Faith 

and History 
Religion 1 14 New Testament Faith 

and History 
Religion 226 Biblical Archaeology 

It is furthermore suggested that the 
student choose electives in other depart- 
ments that may complement the studies 
of art history. Among these recom- 
mended electives are: 

French 412 French Literature of the 

19th Century 
English 336 Shakespeare 

Music 1 17 Survey of Western Music 
Music 335 History of Western Music I 
Music 336 History of Western Music II 
Theatre 332 History of Theatre I 

Theatre 333 History of Theatre II 



The BFA degree in sculpture: 

The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution re- 
quirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Mercerville, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling 1 and II (Art 
1 16 and 226), Sculpture I and 11 (Art 225 
and 335), Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and 
221), Introduction to Photography (Art 
227), 2-D Design (Art 115), Survey of 
Art (Art 222 and 223), and two addition- 
al courses in Art History (Art 331, 332, 
333. 334, 336. 339). 

Twelve additional course units are re- 
quired of the student. The student must 
meet the requirements of the distribution 
program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one of 
the field specialization apprenticeships at 
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey. 
This requires the student to be at the 
Johnson Atelier for a period of between 
16 and 23 '/2 months. The student re- 



ceives eight course units of credit at 
Lycoming College for successfully com- 
pleting the field specialization appren- 
ticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is expected 
that the work for the apprenticeship com- 
ponent will be completed during the 
summers and the junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree program 
is on the basis of meeting the admission 
standards of Lycoming College, and pas- 
sing a portfolio review and interview by 
members of the Lycoming College Art 
Department. 

Three minors are being offered by the 
Art Department. Requirements for each 
follow: Art History: Art 222, 223, and 
two advanced history courses; Sculpture: 
Art 1 16, 226, 225, and 335 plus one of 
the following: 111, 119, 445; Painting: 
Art 111, 115, 220, 330, and either 22 1 or 
223. 



Ill DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar 
with different drawing techniques and 
media. Some drawings from nature. Offered 
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and 
III 

115 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in rela- 
tionship to the other two-dimensional arts. 
Perceptual theories and their relationships to 
what and why we see what we see in art are 
discussed with each problem 

lit) FIGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and 
proportions of the figure. The course is con- 
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class. 
At least one figure per student will be cast. 

119 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it re- 
lates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics of 
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught 
to encourage expression rather than to dis- 
pense merely a technical body of informa- 
tion. 

212 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for the 
artist The color theories of Johannes Itten 
will form the base for this course with some 



study of the theories of Albert Munsell. Fa- 
ber Berren, and Wilhelm Ostwald. 

220 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials. Coordination of color, value, and 
design within the painting is taught. Some 
painting from the figure. No limitations as to 
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre- 
requisite: An //5 or consent of instructor. 

221 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. Emph- 
asis is placed on realism and figure-ground 
coordination with the use of value and de- 
sign. Prerequisite: An III. 

222 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
Paleolithic Art, Near East. Egypt. Greece. 
Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

223 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
I4th-20th centuries. 



225 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materials, 
and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax. 
wood, and other materials will be used. The 
course will be concerned with ideas about 
sculpture as expression, and with giving 
material form to ideas. 

226 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce 
larger, more complex figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of the 
works in plaster Prerequisites: An 116 and 
consent of instructor. 

227 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives of the course are to develop tech- 
nical skills in the use of photographic equip- 
ment (cameras, films, darkroom, printmak- 
er) and to develop sensitivity in the areas of 
composition, form, light, picture quality, 
etc. Each student must own or have access to 
a 35mm camera, 

228 PRINTMAKING I 

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen, 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography print- 
ing. One edition of at least six prints must be 



26 



completed in each area. Prerequisite: An 
HI or 115 or consent of instructor. 

229 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on use 
of the wheel and technical aspects such as 
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite: 
Art 119. 

330 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting media, 
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: An 
220. 

331 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1 880 
to the present, including Cubism, Fauvism. 
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. 
Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and Mondrian 
are among the major artists studied. 

332 AMERICAN ART OF THE 
20TH CENTURY 

The art of the United States from about 1 880 
to the present, with emphasis on the innova- 
tions of Americans in painting, sculpture and 
architecture, and on the meaning and histor- 
ical roots of contemporary art. 

333 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN 
AND AMERICAN ART 

The art of Western Europe and the United 
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on 
painting in France. Those artists to be studied 
include David and Goya, Delacroix, Cour- 
bet. The Impressionists, Turner, Homer. 
Cole and Eakins. 

334 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 

The art of Italy and Northern Europe from 
1330-1530. with emphasis on the painters 
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci, 
Raphael. Titan, Van Eyck, and Dijrer, the 
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Miche- 
langelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and 
Alberti. 

335 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical process. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prere- 
quisite: Art 225. 

336 ART OF THE BAROQUE 
Seventeenth-century painting and sculpture 
in Italy and the Netherlands with emphasis 
on Bernini, Poussin. Rubens, and Rem- 
brandt, and with special attention given to 
the expressive, narrative, painterly, and tac- 
tile styles present in their art. 

337 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photogra- 



phy I by continued growth in technical exper- 
tise including instruction in the use and capa- 
bilities of large format view cameras. Emph- 
asis is placed on conceptual and aesthetic 
aspects of photography. Prerequisite: Art 
227. 

338 PRINTMAKING II 

Further study of the techniques of silkscreen. 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography pnnting 
with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity 
printing. Two editions of at least six prints 
must be completed in each of two areas. 
Prerequisite: An 228. 

339 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions of 
women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of art. No prerequisite . 

440 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 

441 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individual 
style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

442 SPECIAL PROJECT IN 
COMMERCIAL DESIGN 
Concentrated research, preparation, and ex- 
ecution of one major project in commercial 
design chosen by the student in consultation 
with the instructor Preliminary concepts, 
preparatory layout and design and finished 
work will culminate in a portfolio and pre- 
sentation. Prerequisite : permission of the An 
Department. 

445 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisites: Art 116, 225. and 335. 

446 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of the 
appropriate faculty member, includes crea- 
tion of work which may be incorporated in 
the senior group exhibition Student works in 
private studio assigned by the department. 

447 ART HISTORY RESEARCH 
Independent research, conducted under the 
supervision of the appropriate faculty mem- 
ber, includes the research and writing of a 
thesis, to be presented to a committee of Art 
Department faculty 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau, lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following courses offered at Williams- 
port Area Community College are avail- 
able only to Art majors in Commercial 
Design and Mass Communication ma- 
jors (GC0511 only). The WACC 
courses are taken as part of the student's 
schedule and are listed with Lycoming's 
offerings during registration periods. 

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of matenals, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 4 cr. 

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical! and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 

521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom proce- 
dures for reproduction of line and halftone 
copy on process camera. 4 cr. 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Fisher, Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
designed to train students in the field of 
planetarium education; it also may serve 
as a basis for earning state certification as 
a secondary school teacher of general 
science. The major in physics can pre- 
pare students for graduate work in phy- 



27 



sics, astronomy, and related physical sci- 
ences, for the cooperative program in 
engineering, for state certification as 
secondary school teachers of physics, or 
for technical positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires 
Astronomy 111, either 1 12 or 1 13, 230, 
344, 445 and 446; Physics 225-226; 
Mathematics 128 and 129; and Chemis- 
try 1 1 and 1 1 1 or 330-33 1 . Juniors and 
seniors majoring in astronomy are also 
required to register for four semesters of 
Astronomy 349 & 449 (non-credit collo- 
quia). In addition, the following cognate 
courses are recommended: Physics 229 
and 333; Philosophy 223 and 333; and 
Art 227. 

104 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field tech- 
niques needed to study the geology of an 
area. May or summer term only. 

105 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to 
the present, emphasizing the impact that 
astronomical discoveries and the conquest of 
space have had on Western culture Ma\ or 
summer term only. 

107 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportunity 
to make a variety of astronomical observa- 
tions, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetar- 
ium is used to familiarize the student with the 
sky at various times during the year and from 
different locations on earth. May or summer 
term only. 

101 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 
1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the uni- 
verse from the solar system to distant galax- 
ies. Describes the techniques and instru- 
ments used in astronomical research. Pre- 
sents not only what is reasonably well known 
about the universe, but also considers some 
of the major unsolved problems Astronomy 
101 and III share the same three hours of 
lecture and two hours of laboratory each 
week. Ill has one additional hour each week 
for more advanced mathematical treatment 
of the material. Credit may not be earned for 
both 101 and III. Corequisite for III: 
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor. 



102 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

112 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that con- 
tinually affect the planet Earth, shaping our 
environment. Describes how past events and 
lifeforms can be reconstructed from pre- 
served evidence to reveal the history of our 
planet from its origin to the present. Empha- 
sizes the ways in which geology, meteorolo- 
gy, and oceanography interrelate with man 
and the environment. Astronomy 102 and 
112 share the same three hours of lecture and 
two hours of laboratory each week. 112 has 
one additional hour each week for more adv- 
anced mathematical treatment of the mate- 
rial. Credit may not be earned for both 102 
and 112. Corequisite for 112: Mathematics 
107 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

103 METEOROLOGY (B) 

113 METEOROLOGY (A) 

The general properties of the atmosphere and 
their measurements will be discussed m 
terms of basic physical laws. The large scale 
processes that create a suitable climate for 
life on Earth are discussed as well as the 
smaller scale processes that must be taken 
into account in scientific weather prediction. 
Astronomy 103 and 1 13 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each week. 1 13 has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical treat- 
ment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 103 and 113. Corequisitefor 
113: Mathematics 107. Alternate years. 

230 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects of 
planetarium programming, operation and 
maintenance. Students are required to pre- 
pare and present a planetanum show Upon 
successfully completing the course, students 
are eligible to become planetarium assis- 
tants. Three hours of lecture and demonstra- 
tion and three hours of practical training per 
week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 101 or 1 1 1 
(Principles of Astronomy) or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modem cosmological 
models Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy III (Principles of 
Astronomy A ) and Physics 225 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Physics 344. 

445 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the inter- 



nal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 
transport within stars. The evolution of stars 
from initial formation to final stages. The 
creation of chemical elements by nuc- 
leosynthesis. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy III (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus III. Alternate years. 

446 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 
The motion of objects in gravitational fields. 
Introduction to the n-body problem. The re- 
lation between stellar motions and the galac- 
tic potential The large scale structure of 
galaxies in general and of the Milky Way 
Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture 
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy III 
(Principles of Astronomy A ) and Physics 225 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). 
Alternate years. 

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, phy- 
sics, and related scientific areas talk about 
their own research or professional activities. 
In addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students 
majoring in this department are required to 
attend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and En- 
gineering are required to attend two semes- 
ters and present one lecture during their 
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per 
week. Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
225-226, 331, 332, and four additional 
physics courses numbered 229 and 
above. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 1 1 1 , 1 12, 1 13, 445, and 446 



28 



may substitute for two of the four physics 
electives. Also required are Mathematics 
128 and 129, and Chemistry 1 10 and 1 1 1 
or 330-33 1 . Juniors and seniors majoring 
in physics are required to register for four 
semesters of Physics 349 & 449 (non- 
credit colloquia). In addition, the follow- 
ing cognate courses are recommended: 
Mathematics 231 and 238 (these are re- 
quired for the cooperative engineering 
program and by most graduate schools); 
Computer Science 125 (required for the 
coojjerative engineering program); and 
Philosophy 223 and 333. A foreign lan- 
guage is recommended for students plan- 
ning on graduate study. 

106 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geoth- 
ermal. The advantages and disadvantages of 
each energy conversion method. Including 
availability, efficiency, and environmental 
effects. Present areas of energy research and 
possible future developments. Projections of 
possible future energy demands. Exercises 
and expenments in energy collection, con- 
version, and utilization. May or summer 
term only. 



125-126 



PHYSICS WITH LIFE 
SCIENCE APPLICATIONS 



The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus in- 
troductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, 
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and 
magnetism, waves, optics, and radioactiv- 
ity . Many of the examples and problems used 
to illustrate the physics are selected from the 
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of recitation, and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite : 
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor. 
(Credit may not be earned for both 125 and 
225 or for both 126 and 226.). 



225-226 



INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS 
WITH CALCULUS 



A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, 
astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and modem physics. Five hours of lecture 
and recitation and one three-hour laboratory 
per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 128- 
129 (Calculus I and II). (Credit may not be 
earned for both 125 and 225 or for both 126 
and 226). 



229 ELECTRONICS 

DC. and AC. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, operation- 
al amplifiers, integrated circuits, and intro- 
duction to digital electronics will be covered. 
Three lectures and two two-hour laboratory 
sessions per week. Prerequisites: Physics 
126 or 226. and Mathematics 109 or 128 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

331 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro- 
duction to the mechanics of continuous 
media. Moving reference frames. Lagran- 
gian mechanics. Four hours of lecture and 
three hours of laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisites: Physics 225 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus I) and Mathematics 129 (Cal- 
culus II). 

332 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 

The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magne- 
tic properties of matter. Electric circuits. 
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes 
electronics as well as classical electricity and 
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II). 

333 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physic- 
al optics, interference, Fraunhofer and Fres- 
nel diffraction, and coherence and lasers will 
be covered. Three hours of lecture and three 
hours of labratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 126 or 226. and Mathematics 109 or 
128 or consent of instructor. A Iternate years . 

337 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be presented, 
showing that the macroscopic properties of a 
system can be specified without a knowledge 
of the microscopic properties of the consti- 
tuents of the system. Then statistical mecha- 
nics will be developed, showing that these 
same macroscopic properties are determined 
by the microscopic properties. Four hours of 
lecture and recitation per week. Prere- 
quisites: Physics 226 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus II) and Mathematics 129 (Cal- 
culus II). Alternate years. 

338 ATOMIC AND 
MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the ear- 
liest evidence of quantization Structure and 
spectra of atoms and molecules. Extension of 
quantum theory to the solid stale . Four hours 
of lecture and recitation and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Physics 



226 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) 
and Mathematics 129 (Calculus II). Alter- 
nate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modem cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy III (Principles of 
Astronomy A ) and Physics 225 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344. 

439 INTRODUCTION TO 

QUANTUM MECHANICS 
Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple harmo- 
nic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and cen- 
tral force problems will be discussed. Both 
time-independent and time-dependent per- 
turbation theory will be covered. Four hours 
of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite: either 
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II) or Chemistry 33 1 (Physical Chemis- 
try II). and Mathematics 231 (Differential 
Equations). Cross-listed as Chemistry 439. 

447 NUCLEAR AND 

PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of nuclei, 
nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear reac- 
tions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The in- 
teractions of nuclear particles with matter 
and the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed phe- 
nomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fundamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measurable distances, and 
what is expected to occur at even smaller 
distances. Four hours of lecture and recita- 
tion and mo hours of laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: either Physics 226 (Introduc- 
tory Physics with Calculus II) or Physics 126 
(Physics with Life Science Applications II). 
Mathematics 129, and either Physics 338 
(Atomic and Molecular Physics) or Chemis- 
try 1 10. Alternate years. 

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, phy- 
sics, and related scientific areas talk about 
their own research or professional activities. 
In addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 



29 



vey or on individual research. Students 
majoring in this department are required to 
attend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and En- 
gineering are required to attend two semes- 
ters and present one lecture during their 
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per 
week. Crass-listed us Asrrimomy 349 & 449. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under the 
supervision of professional physicists em- 
ployed by local industries or hospitals. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



BIOLOGY 



Professor: Angstadt 

(Chairperson) 
Associate Professor; Diehl, Gabriel, 

Zaccaria, Zimmerman 
Assistant Professor: Pottmeyer 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222, 
223, 224, and 225. In addition, juniors 
and seniors majoring in Biology are re- 
quired to register for Biology 349/449 
(non-credit colloquium) during all 
semesters on campus. With departmental 
consent. Biology 226 may be substituted 
for Biology 221 . Only two courses num- 
bered below 200 may count toward the 
major. Departmental internships cannot 
be used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of che- 
mistry and two units of mathematical sci- 
ence are required. The chemistry re- 
quirement must include at least one unit 
of organic chemistry chosen from Che- 
mistry 115, 220, or 221. The mathema- 
tical science courses must be chosen 
from Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 103, 107, 109, 128 or 
above. Certain specific exceptions to the 
core program will be made for three-year 



students enrolled in cooperative prog- 
rams. Such exceptions are noted under 
the particular cooperative program de- 
scribed in the Academic Program chapter 
of the catalog. Students interested in 
these programs should contact the prog- 
ram director before finalizing their indi- 
vidual programs. Credit may not be 
earned for both Biology 101 and 1 10 or 
for both Biology 102 and 111. Consent 
of instructor may replace Biology 110- 
111 as a prerequisite for all biology 
courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the com- 
pletion of four upper-level (200's or 
higher) courses, with their appropriate 
prerequisites. At least two of these must 
be from the 200's series of courses. A 
minor with a special name (e.g.. En- 
vironmental Science) may be designed 
by an individual. 

1 1 - 1 02 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, in- 
cluding ecological systems, form and func- 
tion in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular 
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adapta- 
tion, and evolution. The course is designed 
primarily for students not planning to major 
in the biological sciences. Three hours of 
lecture and one two-hour laboratory' per 
week. 

1 1 0- 1 1 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology de- 
signed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. 

113-114 HUMAN ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 

Using the organ-systems approach, the 
course is an introduction to the human body 
— its anatomy, physiology, and normal de- 
velopment — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organismal). Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of discussion, and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Chemis- 
try 115 or Chemistry 220 or consent of in- 
structor. 

221 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology of 



microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and in- 
dustrial applications. Three hours of lecture 
and (M'o two-hour laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology llO-lll. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Biology 226. 

Ill GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment 
of classical, molecular, cytological, phy- 
siological, microbial, human, and popula- 
tion genetics. Three hours of lecture and tv,o 
two-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 1 10-11 1. 

223 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endoc- 
rine, digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, 
renal, nervous, and reproductive systems. 
Mammalian physiology is stressed. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biologv 110- 
111. 

224 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical, 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal 
populations and communities. Included will 
be field studies of local habitats as well as 
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology IIO-IJ I. 

225 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants and 
related organisms. The study will comprise 
four general topic areas: form, including 
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth 
and reproduction; function, concentrating on 
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo- 
synthetic organisms; classification systems 
and plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111. 

lit MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE 
HEALTH SCIENCES 
A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing in- 
fectious diseases will be presented. Labora- 
tory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serolo- 
gy, anaerobic techniques and a study of 
hemolytic reactions. Three hours of lecture 
and four hours of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: one year of introductory level 



30 



biolo^w one vear of chemislr\ or consent of 
instructor. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Biology 221 . 

328 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with fresh- 
water ecosystems. Studies will include a sur- 
vey of the plankton, benthos, and fish — as 
well as the physical and chemical character- 
istics of water that influence their distribu- 
tion. Several local field trips and a one-week 
trip to a field station will familiarize students 
with the diversity of habitats and the techni- 
ques of limnologists. Alternative May terms. 
Prerequisites: Biology I lO-l 1 1 . 

329 TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY 

A field oriented course where students study 
the creatures of the fnnging reefs, barrier 
reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and man- 
grove swamps at a tropical marine labora- 
tory. Studies will include survey of plankton, 
invertebrates, and fish a.s well as the physical 
and chemical characteristics that influence 
theirdistribution. Prerequisite: Biology 110- 
III. Alternate May terms. 

330 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
OF VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs of 
the vertebrates. Special attention is given to 
the progressive modification of organs from 
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology I lO-l 1 1 . Alter- 
nate years. 

332 PLANT AND 

GREENHOUSE MANAGEMENT 
A course concerned with the care of house- 
plants and the management of small green- 
houses. Class time will include lectures, dis- 
cussions, demonstrations, greenhouse exer- 
cises, and field trips to local greenhouses. 
Topics will include the theoretical and prac- 
tical aspects of the care and feeding, prop- 
agation, light and water requirements, and 
disease control for many of the common 
house and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: 
Biology 101 -102 or I lO-l 1 1 . May termonly. 

334 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla 
with emphasis on phylogeny. physiology, 
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour 
lecture! laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 1 10-111. Alternate years. 

335 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 
Physicochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, de- 
velopment and responses of organisms. 



Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
I lO-1 1 1 and a year of chemistry. Alternate 



339 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the rela- 
tionships of heredity to disease. Discussions 
will focus on topics such as chromosomal 
abnormalities, metabolic variation and dis- 
ease, somatic cell genetics, genetic screen- 
ing, and immunogenetics. Laboratory exer- 
cises will offer practical expenences in gene- 
tic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biol- 
ogy 101-102 or 1 10-11 1. Max term only. 

342 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment and 
social contexts. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory each week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology I lO-l 1 1 . Alternate years. 

347 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 
how pathogens cause disease and host de- 
fense mechanisms against infectious dis- 
eases. Characterization of and relationships 
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies 
are presented. Serological assays will in- 
clude: agglutination precipitations, im- 
munofluorescence, Immunoelectrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities 
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison 
ivy), immunological renal diseases, im- 
munohematology (blood groups, etc.), the 
chemistry and function of complement auto- 
immunity, and organ graft rejection phe- 
nomena. Three hours of lecture, one three- 
hour laboratory, and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10- 
III. Alternate years. 

403 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and 
animal materials. Summer term only. 

431 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed from 
them. Focus is on normal human histology. 
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
1 10-111. Alternate years. 

433 ECONOMIC AND 

SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 
Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for hu- 



man affairs. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisites: Biology 1 10-11 1, Biology 225. 
Alternate years. 

440 PARASITOLOGY AND 

MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 
The biology of parasites and parasitism. Stu- 
dies on the major groups of animal parasites 
andanthropod vectorsof disease will involve 
taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis will be 
made on parasites of medical and veterinary 
importance. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 1 10-11 1. Alternate years. 

441 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture! laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-1 U . Alter- 
nate years. 

444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, in- 
cluding allostenc control, induction, repres- 
sion, as well as the various types of inhibitive 
control mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, 
one three-hour laboratory and one hour of 
arranged work per week. Prerequisite: Che- 
mistry 220-221 or Chemistry 115. or consent 
of instructor. Cross-listed as Chemistry 444. 
Alternate years. 

445 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and 
organisms. Consideration will be given to 
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam- 
age . Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 1 10-111 . one year of chemistry. 
Alternate years. 

446 PLANT ANATOMY 

AND PHYSIOLOGY 
A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors will be examined from 
a background of the structure and develop- 
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology IIO-III. Biology 225. Alternate 
years. 

448 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role 
of the endocrine hormones in the integration 



31 



of body functions. This is followed by a 
study of the control of hoimone synthesis and 
release, and a consideration of the mechan- 
isms by which hormones accomplish their 
effects on target organs. Two three-hour lec- 
turellaboratorx periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biolo^v 1 1 0-11 1 - Alternate years. 

349 & 449 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM 

This course offers the student a chance to 
become familiar with research in the Biolo- 
gical Sciences using techniques such as 
meeting and talking with active researchers, 
reading and critically analyzing the current 
literature, and discussing the ideas and 
methods shaping Biology. Students will be 
required to read and analyze scientitTc pap- 
ers, actively participate in discussions, and, 
in the senior year, present the results of a 
literature survey or of individual research. 
Students majoring in this department are re- 
quired to enroll during all semesters spent on 
campus in the Junior and senior \ears. A 
letter grade will be given in a semester when 
the student gives a lecture; in other semesters 
the grade will be S/U. Non-credit course. 
One hour per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
majors with junior or senior class standing. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have in- 
volved stream analysis, gypsy moth re- 
search, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Associate Professor: Weaver 

(Chairperson) 
Lecturer: Larrabee. Wagner 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must complete 
one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train students 
in the functions of today's profit and non- 



profit organizations. The program pro- 
vides a well-balanced preparation for a 
wide variety of careers, including gener- 
al administration, personnel administra- 
tion, commercial banking, investments 
and portfolio management, security 
analysis, corporate financial manage- 
ment, general marketing, sales, product 
management, advertising, retail mer- 
chandising, and production and manu- 
facturing management. 

Required courses are Business 110, 
1 1 1 , 223, 228-229, 338, 339, 440, 441 , 
Mathematics 103. and Computer Scien- 
ce 108. Business 332 or 443 may be 
substituted for Business 229, and Busi- 
ness 340 may be substituted for Business 
339. Accounting 110 may he substituted 
for Business 1 10 if the student is transfer- 
ring into the business administration ma- 
jor, but duplicate credit will not be 
granted. 

Majors are encouraged to take Busi- 
ness 335, 336, Economics 110, III, En- 
glish 216, Mass Communication 211, 
Mathematics 112, Philosophy 216, and 
Psychology 225. Majors also are encour- 
aged to take a foreign language. The 
additional elective offerings are intended 
to add depth in the areas of finance, 
marketing, and management. 

Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train students 
in the quantitative aspects of business 
administration. It provides e.xcellent 
undergraduate preparation for graduate 
study in management science, operations 
research, and quantitative business 
administration. The program also pro- 
vides a solid preparation for careers in 
production control, systems analysis, re- 
search, forecasting, industrial and tech- 
nical sales and any of the functional areas 
of business where quantitative training 
would be an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 110, 
III, 223, 338, 339, 446: Economics 
no. 111, 441: Mathematics 103, 112, 
128, 129, 338, and Computer Science 
108. Accounting 1 10 may be substituted 
for Business 1 10 if the student is transfer- 
ring into the business administration 
major. 



Minors 

The Business Administration Depart- 
ment offers two minors. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Marketing: Business 228, 229, 332, 
445, and 443 or 448. A minor in Finance 
requires the completion of Business 338, 
339, 340, and Economics 220, 441, or 
Accounting 225. 

1 10 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the art of measuring, com- 
municating, and interpreting tlnancial activ- 
ity. Recording, classifying and summarizing 
business transactions, the interpretation of 
accounts, and the preparation of financial 
statements are studied. Prerequisite or core- 
quisite: Computer Science 108 or consent of 
instructor. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Accounting 110. 

1 1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the various components of 
managerial accounting Emphasis is placed 
on managerial problem solving techniques 
and the analysis of the results. Accounting 
systems, costing procedures, cost-volume 
profit relationships, managerial control pro- 
cesses and the use of computers as aids to 
decision making are studied. Students will 
gain hands-on experience with various com- 
puter applications of managerial accounting. 
Prerequisite: Business 110 or Accounting 
110. 

223 QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 
making business decisions. Topics include: 
decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, forecasting, and other selected ap- 
plications. Students will be introduced to 
computer applications of the quantitative 
models. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

228-229 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an 
analysis and evaluation of the marketing sys- 
tem, its institutions, and processes. Applica- 
tion of marketing principles and the develop- 
ment of strategies for specific marketing 
problems. Product, channel flow, promo- 
tion, and pricing strategies explored. Read- 
ings, cases, and games. 

332 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of 
promotion. Techniques of analysis and con- 
trol in the use of advertising and publicity as 
tools in developing business strategy. Prere- 
quisite: Business 228 or consent of in- 
structor. 



32 



335 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature, 
sources, and fundamentals of the law in 
generaL and particularly as relating to con- 
tracts, agency, and negotiable instruments. 
Open only to juniors and seniors. 

336 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history of 
the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open onh to 
juniors and seniors. 

338 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I 

An introduction to working capital manage- 
ment and financial analysis and planning. 
Topics are covered through readings, cases 
and problem solving in the areas of decisions 
on current asset and liability structures, cash 
and marketable securities, accounts receiv- 
ables, inventory management and control, 
spontaneous financing, short-term borrow- 
ing, ratio and financial statement analysis, 
source and use statements, cash flow fore- 
casting, and financial statements forecast- 
ing. Prerequisites: Mathematics 103: Busi- 
ness 110, 111, and 223: or consent of in- 
structor. 

339 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II 

A study of capital asset structure and long- 
term financial decisions. Topics are covered 
through readings, cases, and problem solv- 
ing in the areas of capital budgeting, includ- 
ing risk and required rates of return, leverag- 
ing the firm, concepts of capital structures, 
dividend policy, external financing, term 
and lea.se financing, long-term debt, equity 
securities, convertible securities and war- 
rants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or consent 
of instructor. 

340 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of the 
economy and the structure and functions of 
financial markets and the agencies involved; 
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the 
various types of investments available. 
Techniques used to evaluate financial secur- 
ities. Also covered are recent developments 
in investment theory. Prerequisite: Business 
338 or consent of instructor. 

440 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional rela- 
tionships of a business organiztion as well as 
the problems encountered in coordinating the 
internal resources of a firm. Emphasis on 
administrative efficiency and procedures. 

441 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of busi- 
ness operations; setting of goals; coordina- 
tion of resources, development of policies. 
Analysis of strategic decisions encompas- 



sing all areas of a business, and the use and 
analysis of control measures. Emphasis on 
both the internal relationship of various ele- 
ments of production, finance, marketing, 
and personnel, and the relationship of the 
business entity to external stimuli. Readings, 
cases, and games. Prerequisites: Business 
223. 228-229. 338. 339. and 440. or consent 
of instructor. Seniors only. 

442 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial problems 
of recruiting, selecting, training, and retrain- 
ing the human resources of the firm. Emph- 
asis is placed on the interrelationship of per- 
sonnel policies with management objectives 
and philosophies in such areas as fringe be- 
nefits, wage and salary policies, union acti- 
vities, and health and safety. 

443 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop- 
ment through store location, layout, admi- 
nistration organization, buying, and pricing. 
Cases, readings, and papers. Prerequisite: 
Business 228 or consent of instructor. 

445 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practices 
of Marketing Research. The focus is on the 
development and application of Marketing 
Research Studies. Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research re- 
port writing. Readings, cases, and research 
project. Mathematics 103 and Business 228 
or consent of instructor. 

446 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiza- 
tion, and controlling of operations in a pro- 
duction facility . The course also incorporates 
quantitative techniques and computer ap- 
plications used in the production and opera- 
tions management environment. Topics in- 
clude capacity and layout planning, facility 
location analysis, job design and work 
measurement, production scheduling, mate- 
rials requirement planning models, and qual- 
ity controls. Students will engage in the 
actual design of an inventory status file and 
MRP system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or 
consent of instructor. 

447 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy. 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for pnnt media, radio, and direct mail. Pri- 
marily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 
application to practical advertising, and tai- 
lored to the interests of individual students. 



May term. Prerequisite: Business 332 or 
consent of instructor. 

448 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 
creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 
Prerequisite: Business 228 or consent of in- 
structor. 

449 MANAGING THE 
SMALL BUSINESS 

How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from a 
small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manu- 
facturing firm. May term. Prerequisite: 
Business 111. 228, and 338 or consent of 
instructor. May term. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for 
a paper products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the economic 
impact of a college on a community: a 
marketing strategy for a local firm enterting 
the consumer market. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 
A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Bularzik, 

McDonald 

A major in chemistry consists of Che- 
mistry 110-111, 220-221, 330-331, 332 
and 333; Physics 225-226; Mathematics 
128, 129 and one of the following 
courses: Mathematics 103, 231, 238, 
332, or Computer Science 125. 
Mathematics 23 1 and 238 and French or 
German are strongly recommended for 
students planning on graduate study in 
chemistry. To be certified in secondary 



33 



education, chemistry majors must also 
pass two biology courses numbered 1 10 
or higher. 

A minor in Chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 220 or 
higher; at least one must be taken from 
each of the following groups: Group A 
(220-221, 440, 441, 444, 445) and 
Group B (226 or 332, 330-331, 333. 
439, 443). Named minors in specialized 
areas may be designed by students with 
departmental approval. 

108 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An Introduction to the principles of Inorganic 
chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases. 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib- 
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiomet- 
ry. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with Illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 1 15. 
this course is designed for those students who 
require only two semesters of chemistry, and 
Is not intended for students planning to enroll 
In chemistry courses numbered 200 or 
above. Three hours lecture . one hour discus- 
sion, and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: high school algeb- 
ra or Math 005. Not open for credit to stu- 
dents iiTio have received credit for Chemistry 

no. 

1 10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include 
stolchiomctry. atomic and molecular struc- 
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermoche- 
mistry, gases, solutions, and chemical reac- 
tions. The laboratory Introduces the student 
to methods of separation, purification, and 
identification of compounds according to 
their physical properties. This course is de- 
signed for students who plan to major in one 
of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one 
hour Ji.nussion and one three-hour labora- 
tory period each week. Prerequisite: place- 
ment in Chemistry 110 is determined in part 
by a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for Che- 
mistry 108. except by permission of the Che- 
mistry Department. 

1 1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 110. with 
emphasis placed on the foundations of analy- 
tical. Inorganic, and physical chemistry. 
Topics include kinetics, general and ionic 
equilibria, acid-base theory, electrochemis- 
try, thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, 
coordination chemistry, and descriptive in- 
organic chemistry of selected elements. The 



laboratory treats aspects of quantitative and 
qualitative Inorganic analysis. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 1 10 or consent of the Che- 
mistry Department. 

115 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon This course will Illustrate the princi- 
ples of organic chemistry with material re- 
levant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics Include nomenclature, 
alkanes. arenes, functional derivatives, ami- 
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and 
other naturally occurring compounds. This 
course Is designed for students who require 
only one semester of organic chemistry. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108 or 1 10. 
Not open for credit to students who have 
received credit for Chemistry 220. 

220-221 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of car- 
bon. Including both aliphatic and aromatlc 
series. The laboratory work introduces the 
student to simple fundamental methods of 
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis. 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry III 

226 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analy- 
sis with an orientation toward clinical ap- 
plications in medical technology. Topics in- 
clude: general methods and calculations; 
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses 
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (lon- 
.selective electrodes, coulometry), automa- 
tion. Lecture, recitation, and laboratory dai- 
ly. Prerequisite: Chemistry I lO-l 1 1 or con- 
sent of instructor. May not be taken for credit 
followinji Chemistry 332. May term only. 

3.10-331 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work Includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
111, Mathematics 129. and one year of phy- 
sics or consent of instructor. 

332 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of gra- 
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary In- 
strumental analysis together with practice in 
laboratory techniques and calculations of 



these methods. Two hours lecture and fwo 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry III or consent of 
instructor. 

333 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A study of modem theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 330. Mathematics 129. 
and one year of physics or consent of in- 
structor. 

439 INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic concepts, 
and formulation of quantum mechanics with 
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free 
particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and 
central-force problems will be Investigated. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. The ele- 
gant operator formalism of quantum mecha- 
nics will conclude the course. Four hours of 
lecture and recitation. Prerequisites: 
Mathematics 231 . either Chemistry 331 or 
Physics 226, and consent of instructor. 
Cross-listed as Physics 439. 

440 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
Theory and application of modem synthetic 
organic chemistry. Topics may include ox- 
idation-reduction processes, carbon-carbon 
bond forming reactions, functional group 
transformations, and multistep syntheses of 
natural products (antiobiotics. antitumor 
agents, and antiviral agents). Three hours 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 . 

441 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds 
and mixtures. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221. 

443 ADVANCED 
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods with 
emphasis on chromatographic, electroche- 
mical, and spectroscopic methods of in- 
stmmental analysis. Three hours lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and332 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, in- 
cluding allosteric control. Induction, repres- 



34 



sion as well as the various types of inhibitive 
control mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemis- 
try 221 or 115 or consent of instructor. 
Cross-listed as Biology 444. 

445 SPECTROSCOPY AND 

MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 
Theory and practice of molecular structure 
determination by spectroscopic methods. 
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites: 
Chemistry 331. 333. or consent of in- 
structor. 

348 & 448 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own reseach activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical liter- 
ature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of non- 
credit Chemistry Colloquium taken during 
the junior and senior years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work under su- 
pervision in an industrial laboratory and sub- 
mit a written report on the project. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index! 
The student will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project and will write a thesis 
on the work. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project with emphasis being on 
the student's showing initiative and making a 
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be 
written. 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal 
justice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal 
justice functions. Its aim is to develop 
students' intellectual and scientific skills 
in raising and attempting to answer 
important questions about the system of 
justice and its place in society. The pro- 
gram offers opportunity for intern expe- 



rience in the field, and prepares for 
careers in the areas of law enforcement, 
probation and parole, prisons, and treat- 
ment services. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforcement. 
Track II prepares for careers in correc- 
tions. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. 

The major consists of 10 courses, 
distributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 115) 

Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 223) 
The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
116) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro-American His- 
tory (History 230) or United States 
Social and Intellectual History Since 
1877 (History 443) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 331) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 218) (one 
course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law 
enforcement. (Recommended but 
not required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. 

The major consists of 10 courses, 

distributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 11 -5) 



The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 222) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
1 16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro-American His- 
tory (History 230) or United States 
Social and Intellectual History Since 
1877 (History 443) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 331) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 218) (One 
course) 

C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not 
required for the major). Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 103. Psychology 
431. and Psychology 239. These 
prerequisites may be waived in cer- 
tain cases by the coordinating com- 
mittee. 

Majors should seek advice con- 
cerning course selection from mem- 
bers of the coordinating committee 
and should note course prerequisites 
in planning their programs. 

A minor in Criminal Justice con- 
sists of five courses. Required 
courses include: Soc 115, Introduc- 
tion to Criminal Justice; and any four 
other courses in the Criminal Justice 
major listed above, at least three of 
which must be numbered 200 or 
above. To receive credit for a minor 
in Criminal Justice, a student must 
maintain a minimum 2.0 cum in 
courses completed for the minor. 



35 



ECONOMICS 



Professor: Opdahl (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Madresehee 

The major has two tracks. Traci< I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed to provide a broad 
understanding of economic theory and 
its application to economic, social, and 
business problems. In addition to pre- 
paring students for a career in business 
or government, this track provides an 
excellent background for graduate or 
professional studies. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 

requires Economics 110, 111, 332, and 
either 330 or 441; Business 110 and 111 
or Accounting 1 10 and 220; Business 
338 and 339, plus two electives from 
Economics 220, 229, 331, 335, 337, 
443, and Business 440. Business 340 
(Investments) may be substituted for 
Business 339 (Financial Management 
II). 

Track II — Political Economy 

requires Economics 110 and 111, 331, 
440, 330 or 441 , and three other courses 
in economics. Depending on their 
academic and career interests, students 
are encouraged to select a minor in 
another department such as political sci- 
ence, philosophy, or history. 

In addition, the following courses are 
recommended: all majors — Math 103 
and Business 223; majors planning gra- 
date work — Math 1 12 and 128; Track 
II majors — Business 1 10 and 1 1 1 or 
Accounting 1 10 and 220. 

A minor in Economics requires the 
completion of Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1 
and three other economics courses num- 
bered 200 or above, or any four eco- 
nomics courses numbered 200 or above. 

102 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to teach students how they 
and their families can be intelligent consum- 
ers: that is, how they can spend, save, and 
borrow so as to maximize the value they 
receive for the income thev have Treats 



subjects such as intelligent shopping; the 
uses and abuses of credit; investing savings; 
buying insurance, automobiles, and houses; 
medical care costs; estates and wills, etc. 
Alternate years. 

II n PRINCIPLES OF 

POLITICAL ECONOMY I 
Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What 
influences the level of national income and 
employment' What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government 
in a modem capitalistic system' How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking systems organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism? 
What are the elements of government 
finance and fiscal policy? 

1 1 i PRINCIPLES OF 

POLITICAL ECONOMY II 
This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses 
how business firms decide what and how 
much to produce and how goods and ser- 
vices are priced in different types of mark- 
ets. Also considers such problems as eco- 
nomic growth, international trade, poverty, 
discrimination, ecology, and alternative 
economic systems. 

220 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and 
monetary and fiscal policy; the financial 
organization of society; the banking system; 
credit institutions; capital markets, and 
international financial relations Prerequi- 
sile: Economics 1 10. 

221 COMPARATIVE 
ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 

A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems. 
Aliernale years. 

224 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and 
economic problems associated with urbani- 
zation, including poverty, employment, 
education, crime, health, housing, land use 
and the environment, transportation, and 
public finance. Analysis of solutions 
offered. Alternate vears. 

225 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between environ- 
mental decay and economic growth, with 
particular reference to failures of the price 



and property-rights systems; application of 
cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at the 
creation of an ecologically viable economy. 

226 DEVELOPMENT OF LESS 
DEVELOPED COUNTRIES 
A study of the theories and problems of 
capital accumulation, allocation of 
resources, technological development, 
growth, planning techniques, and institu- 
tions and international relations encountered 
by the developing nations. Alternate years. 

229 BUSINESS CYCLES 
AND FORECASTING 
An introduction to the nature and history of 
business fluctuations, the tools used in 
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to 
explain the cycle, and techniques used in 
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite: 
Economics 110 or permission of the 
instructor. Alternate years. 

330 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory regarding consumer demand, pro- 
duction costs and theory, profit maximiza- 
tion, market structures, and the determin- 
ants of returns to the factors of production. 
Prerequisites: Economics J 10 and III. 
Alternate years. Not open to students who 
have received credit for Economics 441 . 

331 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory and practice with regard to business 
fluctuations, national income accounting, 
the determination of income and employ- 
ment levels, and the use of monetary and 
fiscal policy. Prerequisites: Economics 110 
and III. Alternate years. 

332 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's 
efforts to maintain competition through 
antitrust legislation; to supervise acceptable 
cases of private monopoly through public 
utility regulation and via means of regula- 
tory commissions, and to encourage or 
restrain various types of private economic 
activities. Prerequisites: Economics 110 
and III or consent of instructor. 

335 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions, 
employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations. 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
years. 

337 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expendi- 



36 



tures. taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the use 
of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device. Prerequisites: Economics 1 10 and 
111 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

440 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 

A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas 
embodied in the works of Smith. Marx, 
Schumpeter. Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1 or consent oj 
instructor. Alternate years. 

441 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of busmess 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear pro- 
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc- 
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 110 and III. Some 
understanding of differential calculus is 
recommended. Not open to students who 
have received credit for Economics 330. 

443 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular refer- 
ence to the United States. Subjects covered 
include: U.S. commercial policy and its 
development, international trade theory, 
tariffs and other protectionist devices, inter- 
national monetary system and its problems, 
balance of payments issues. Alternate 
years. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 
III. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, 
or government, supervised by assigned 
employee of sponsoring organization, 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in pre- 
paration for graduate school. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



EDUCATION 



Assistant Professors: Conrad 

(Chairperson), Loncaric 
Part-time Instructors: Dice, Marks, 

Shivetts 

The Education Department offers 
Pennsylvania approved teacher certifica- 
tion programs in elementary and secon- 
dary education, as well as a school nurse 
certification program. 

Students seeking secondary certifica- 
tion must complete Education 200 and 
Psychology 338, as prerequisites to the 
professional semester (Education 446. 
447. 449), as well as the necessary sub- 
ject area courses. Students may earn 
secondary certification in one or more of 
the following areas: Art (K-12), biology, 
chemistry, English, French, general sci- 
ence, German, mathematics, music (K- 
12), physics, school nurse (K-12), social 
studies, and Spanish. 

Students seeking elementary certifica- 
tion must complete Education 200, 
Psychology 338, Mathematics 105, 
Education 000, 341, 342, 343, and 344 
as prerequisites to the professional 
semester (Education 445, 447 and 448). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should refer to the 
Teacher Education Handbook, which 
specifies the current requirements for 
certification. Early consultation with a 
member of the Education Department is 
strongly recommended. Application for 
the professional semester must be made 
during the fall Semester of the junior 
year. The Department of Education 
admits to the professional semester only 
those applicants who are in good 
academic standing, have satisfactorily 
completed the participation require- 
ments, have paid the student teaching 
fee, and have received a positive evalua- 
tion based upon: (a) letters from the stu- 
dent's major department: (b) letters from 
two additional faculty outside the De- 
partment of Education; (c) a screening 
interview conducted by the Education 
Department; and (d) a writing sample 
from the student. Major departments 
have different criteria for their recom- 



mendations. Therefore, the student 
should consult with the chairperson of 
the major department about those re- 
quirements. 

(KK) SEMINAR IN ART. MUSIC. PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

Each elementary student teacher attends a 
series of 18 seminars conducted prior to stu- 
dent teaching, during the Fall Semester of the 
senior year. These seminars, conducted by 
certified public .school personnel, emphasize 
activities and knowledge which are helpful in 
the self-contained elementary classroom. 
Non-credit course. 

005 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading 
and study skills which are useful in college 
Reading comprehension, vocabulary build- 
ing, and critical reading are especially 
emphasized Study skills, including time 
management, textbook reading, reading- 
study systems, notetaking. test-taking skills, 
and library reference skills are also stressed. 
Open only to freshmen nho are enrolled in 
English 005 or with consent of instructor. 
One-half unit of credit. 

200 INTRODUCTION TO 

THE STUDY OF EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
Amencan schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the inten- 
tion that students will examine more rational- 
ly their own motives for entering the profes- 
sion. 

232 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 
AND COMMUNICATIONS 

A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical expenence in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 

239 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and their relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the curri- 
culum, the desirable outcomes of the curricu- 
lum, conflicting and variant conceptions of 
curricular content, modem techniques of 
curricular construction, criteria for the eva- 
luation of curricula, the curriculum as a 
teaching instrument. Emphasis will be 



37 



placed upon the curriculum work wilhin the 
teaching field of each individual. 

341 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES 
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, and 
processes of anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, and 
sociology as they relate to the elementary 
school social-science curriculum. Practical 
applications, demonstrations of methods, 
and the development of integrated teaching 
units using tests, reference books, films, and 
other teaching materials. Observation and 
panic ipallon In Lycoming County 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

342 TEACHING SCIENCE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's science experiences and guiding 
the development of their scientific concepts 
A study of the science content of the curricu- 
lum, its material, and use. Observation and 
participation in Lycoming County 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 



343 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS 
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A course designed to consider the principal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speak- 
ing, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of 
the language arts. Children's literature will 
be explored as a vehicle for developing 
creative characteristics in children and for 
ensuring an appreciation of the creative 
writing of others. Observation and partici- 
pation in Lycoming County elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200 and 
Psychology 338 or consent of instructor. 

344 TEACHING READING IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ration- 
ale for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kin- 
dergarten through sixth grade Emphasis is 
upon designing a reading instructional pro- 
gram which reflects the nature of the learn- 
ing process and recognizes principles of 
child development through examination of 
the principles, problems, methods, and 
materials used in elementary reading pro- 
grams. Observation and participation in 



Lycoming County elementary schools Pre- 
requisites: Psychology 338, Education 200. 
or consent of instructor. 



The Elementary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the Elementary 
Professional Semester: 

Education 445 Methods of Teaching in the 
Elementary School 

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary 
American Education 

Education 448 Student Teaching in the 
Elementary School 

445 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of physical, 
social, and cognitive development and the 
elementary classroom environment. Parti- 
cular consideration will be given to the 
appropriate age and developmental level of 
the students with an emphasis upon selec- 
tion and utilization of methods in all the 
elementary subject areas, including art and 
music. Specific attention is given to the 
development of strategies for structuring 
lesson plans, for maintaining classroom 
control, and for overall classroom manage- 
ment. Direct application is made to the indi- 
vidual student-teaching experience Prereq- 
uisites: Mathematics 105. Education 3-tl. 
342. 343 and 344, or consent of instructor. 

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially tho.se 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

448 STUDENT TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units Professional experience under 
the supervision of a selected cooperating 
teacher in a public elementary school in 
Lycoming County. Student teachers are 
required to follow the calendar of the school 
district to which they are assigned. 

Students are considered full time when enrolled in 
the Professional Semester Those students needing 
an additional course must comply with the stan- 
dards stated in the College catalog. 

The Secondary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the Secondary 
Professional Semester: 



Education 446 Methods of Teaching In the 
Secondary School 

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary 
American Education 

Education 449 Student Teaching in the 
Secondary School 

446 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques with emphasis on the student's 
major. Stress is placed on the selection and 
utilization of visual and auditory aids to 
learning. Students teach demonstration les- 
sons in the presence of the instructor and the 
members of the class and observe superior 
teachers in Lycoming County secondary 
schools. Prerequisite: Education 200, Psy- 
chology 338, and pre-student teaching par- 
ticipation. 

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers In the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

449 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Professional laboratory experi- 
ence under the supervision of a selected 
cooperating teacher in a public secondary 
school in Lycoming County. Student teach- 
ers are required to follow the calendar of the 
school district to which they are assigned. 

Students are considered full time when enrolled in 
the Professional Semester. Those students needing 
an additional course must comply with the stan- 
dards stated in the College catalog. 



ENGLISH 

Prolessors: Jensen (Chairperson), 

Van Marter 
Associale Professor: Rife 
Assistant Professors: Austin. BitJlake, 

Moses. Wild 
Part-time Instructors: Hartsock, Lakey, 

Logue 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 005 or 106. These nine 
courses must include English 217. 220, 



38 



221 , 222, 223, and one from English 335 
and 336. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 1 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preceding 
requirements. With the consent of the 
Department of English, an appropriate 
course from the offerings of other depart- 
ments may be substituted for an English 
elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take En- 
glish 335, English 338. and Theatre 100. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the American 
Studies interdisciplinary major, in which 
American literature courses constitute an 
important part of the American-arts con- 
centration area. 

Because of its emphasis on com- 
munication skills, a major or a minor in 
English is excellent preparation for a 
wide range of professions. In addition to 
preparing students for graduate work or 
for teaching, a major or a minor in En- 
glish can be valuable for those interested 
in a career in law. ministry, publishing, 
editing or writing, and business, to name 
a few. 

Two minors are available in the De- 
partment of English. A minor in Litera- 
ture consists of five literature courses 
numbered 1 12 and above, three of which 
must be numbered 200 or above, and at 
least one of which must be numbered 300 
or above. With the written consent of the 
department, one writing course may be 
substituted for a literature course. A 
minor in Writing consists of five courses: 
English 216 and 217 (both required): an 
advanced course in literature at the 300 
level or above; two other courses 
selected from English 228, 329, and 338. 
With the written consent of the depart- 
ment, an independent studies project in 
writing may be substituted for any re- 
quired course in the writing minor except 
for English 216 and 217. 



005 WORKSHOP IN 

DEVELOPMENTAL WRITING 
Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with major 
emphasis on spelling, grammar, and sent- 



ence structure. Writing assignments and 
classroom exercises designed to ensure mas- 
tery ot the student's special problems m basic 
writing. 

One-halt unit grade of 'S" will be assigned 
when the student has successfully completed 
all of the work m the course. Required of. 
and limited to. those who have not been 
exempted from English 005 

106 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe- 
cial emphasis on developing the composing 
skills needed to articulate and defend a posi- 
tion in various situations requiring the use of 
written English. 

1 12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature de- 
signed for the general student and utilizing 
one of the follow ing approaches; major liter- 
ary genres, selected literary masterpieces, or 
traditional themes in literature. Prerequisiie: 
English 106 or consenl of inslniclor. 

216 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 
Intensive practice in writing and presenting 
mformalion to various audiences within the 
student's own discipline. Includes training in 
the use of graphics and in basic library re- 
search methods. Prerequisites: a grucie ofC 
or heller in English 106 or consenl ofinsiruc- 
lor Allernate years. 

217 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students of 
literature w ith the critical skills necessary for 
an understanding of poetry, fiction, drama, 
and nim. Intensive reading and extensive 
practice in writing the critical essay. Re- 
quired of English majors. Prerequisiie: En- 
glish 106 or consenl of insiruclor. 

220 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from the 
Anglo-Saxon through the Neoclassical 
periods. Such writers as Chaucer. Spenser. 
Shakespeare. Milton. Swift. Pope, and 
Johnson; representative works from Beowulf 
to Sterne's Seniimenlal Journey. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consenl of instructor. 

221 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present Particular 
emphasis on such writers as Blake. Word- 
sworth. Shelley. Keats. Tennyson. Brown- 
ing. Arnold, Hardy. Yeats, Eliot. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consent of instructor. 

222 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800. followed by more in- 
tensive study of the literature and thought of 
the period 1800-1900 Major focus on the 



works of Emerson, Thoreau. Poe. Hawth- 
orne, Melville, Whitman and Dickinson. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. 

223 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies 
in American literature during the present 
century. Such forces as naturalism, realism, 
and modernism; such writers as Twain. 
James. Hemingway. Faulkner. Frost. Eliot, 
and Stevens. Prerequisiie: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. 

224 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative exam- 
ples of the form with emphasis on American 
and European writers of the 19th and 20th 
centuries. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
senl of instructor. 

225 THE NOVEL 

Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 1 8th through the 20th centur- 
ies. Novels analyzed both as works of prose 
art and as turning points in the development 
of the novel. Allernate years. Prerequisiie: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

226 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions of 
literature and film with emphasis on ex- 
amination of representative literary and film 
works. Media comparison to reveal the prob- 
lems of adaptation. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. 

228 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and practice 
of writing fiction and poetry. Students may 
concentrate in either genre or boih. Alternate 
years. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. 

329 BUSINESS AND 
PUBLICITY WRITING 

Analyzing media and audiences for public 
relations and business purposes; planning, 
designing, and writing business reports and 
procedures; press relations and publicity 
methods; the news and feature publicity re- 
lease . Prerequisites: a grade ofC or better in 
English 215 or completion of at least one 
Business Administration or Accounting 
course. Allernate years. 

330 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, plus 
some non-fiction prose, wntten dunng the 
years. 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work of 
at least three poets, two novelists, and 
assorted prose writers. Prerequisiie: English 
106 or consenl of instructor. Alternate vears. 



39 



331 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of such 
major British and American figures as Con- 
rad. Forster, Woolf. Lawrence. Joyce, 
Hemingway. Faulkner, Nabokov, and Bel- 
low. Prerequisite: English 106 or consenl of 
instructor. 

332 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and con- 
tinuing through such writers as Frost, Wil- 
liams. Moore. Stevens. Auden. Lowell. 
Roethke. Thomas. Ginsberg, and Rich. Pre- 
requisite: English 106 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

333 COMEDY. TRAGEDY. AND 
THE MODERN THEATRE 

Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen 
our response to the theatre. Major focus on 
plays, including musicals, from Ibsen and 
Shaw to the present. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

334 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 
Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution 
to the literary canon. Prerequisite: English 
1 06 or consent of instructor . Alternate years . 

335 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis on 
The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to the traditions out 
of which these works arose. Required of ma- 
jors seeking secondary certification in En- 
glish. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

336 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

338 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS 
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spoken 
and written English. Classroom work sup- 
ported by weekly tutorials, in which the stu- 
dent gains practical experience in identify- 
ing, diagnosing, and correcting basic com- 
munications problems. Required of majors 
seeking secondary certification in English. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

440 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 



writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations in- 
clude: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner: 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter: Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne. Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf. Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repeated for credit if the wri- 
ters are different. Prerequisite: English 106 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

441 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 

Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more types 
of literature and as it cuts across various 
epochs. Possible topics include: American 
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression: Religion and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature: Realism in 
the Novel; Literary Modernism; Literature 
and Mythology; The Hero in Literature. May 
be repeated for credit if the topic is different. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a pro- 
fession related to their career interest such as 
law. public relations, journalism, and others. 



N80-N89 



INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index! 



Recent studies include The Arthurian 
Legend, Shakespeare's Women, D.H. 
Lawrence, and T.S. Eliot: The Social Vi- 
sion. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Process 
in Literature and Art and Images of Women 
in the I890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Barker 
Part-time Instructor: Yeager 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore broad- 
ly the varieties of human experience and 
thought. It contributes both to personal 
and to international understanding by 
providing competence in a foreign lan- 
guage and a critical acquaintance with 
the literature and culture of foreign peo- 
ples. A major can serve as entree to 



careers in business, industry, govern- 
ment, publishing, education, journal- 
ism, social agencies, translating, and 
writing. It prepares for graduate work in 
literature or linguistics and the interna- 
tional fields of politics, commerce, law, 
health, and area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The ma- 
jor consists of at least eight courses num- 
bered 1 1 I or above. Majors seeking 
teacher certification and students plan- 
ning to enter graduate school are advised 
to begin study of a second foreign lan- 
guage. The department encourages the 
development in breadth of programs, in- 
cluding allied courses from related fields 
or a second ajor, and also individual or 
established interdisciplinary majors 
combining interest in several literatures 
or area or cross-cultural studies; for ex- 
ample. International Studies, 20th Cen- 
tury Studies, the Major in Literature. 
Majors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to spend 
at least a semester of study abroad by 
applying to one of the many programs 
available. The department maintains a 
file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 225, French 
228 (Section A) and Spanish 331 (Sec- 
tion A). 



Foreign Languages and Literatures 

22."; CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors as 
Cervantes, Dostoevsky. Chekhov, Dante. 
Ibsen. Proust. Gide. Kafka. Hesse, Goethe. 
Sartre, Camus. Brecht. and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or topic; 
recent topics have been existentialism, mod- 
ernism, drama, the Weimar era. and 20th 
century Scandinavian and German prose wri- 
ters. Prerequisite: None. May be repeated 
for credit with consent of instructor. May be 
accepted toward the English major with con- 
sent of the Department of English. 

338 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 

SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 

Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and leaching. Discus- 
sion and application of languge teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken in 



40 



the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to ful- 
fill in the same semester the requirements of 
a participation experience in area schools. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 1 1 1 or above, 
including at least two from 402, 412, 
423, and 427. In addition, all majors who 
wish to be certified for teaching must 
pass courses 221-222, and Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 (the latter 
course with a C or better). 

A minor in French consists of at least 
four courses numbered 221 and above. 
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses , three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

1 1 ■ 1 02 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the fun- 
damentals of the language with a view to 
using them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fun- 
damentals of the language for immediate use 
in speaking, understanding, and reading with 
a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: French 102 or 
equivalent. 

221-222 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite: 
French 112 or equivalent. 

228 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and cultu- 
ral attitudes in contemporary French society. 
Materials studied may include such docu- 
ments as newspaper articles, interviews and 
sociological surveys, and readings in his- 
tory, religion, anthropology, and the arts. 
Some attention to the changing education 
system and the family and to events and ideas 
which have shaped French society. May in- 
clude some comparative study of France and 
the United States. 

English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to- 



ward the foreign language distribution re- 
quirement. Prerequisite: French 221 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

402 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval. Renaissance. Classical and En- 
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson 
de geste. Villon, Montaigne. Corneille. 
Racine. Moliere. Voltaire and Rousseau. 
Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or consent 
of inslriulor. Alternate years. 

412 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE I9TH CENTURY 
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Mussel. Hugo. Vigny. Balzac. Stendhal 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of 
Baudelaire. Rimbaud. Verlaine. and Mal- 
larme. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

423 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the turn 
of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux. Anouilh. 
Sartre. Camus. Beckett. lonesco. Genet. 
Adamov. and others. Prerequisite: French 
222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 

427 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 20TH CENTURY 
Representative poets and novelists of mod- 
ern France. Readings selected from the 
works of authors such as Proust. Gide. Ara- 
gon. Giono. Mauriac. Celine. Malraux. 
Saint-Exupery. Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Grillet, Butor. Sarraute. LeClezio). 
and the poetry of Apollinaire, Valery. the 
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy. Eluard, Char). 
Saint-John Perse, Supervielle. Prevert. and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

441 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 
written French. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, phonetics, pronunciation, oral 
and written composition, and translation. 
Prerequisite: one course from French 402. 
412. 423. 427 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in French include 
translation, existentialism, the classical 
period, enlightenment literature, and Saint- 
Fxupery. 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 1 1 1 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 225 may be included in the 
major with permission. German 431 or 
German 441 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching must pass German 323 and 325 . 
In addition to the eight courses for the 
major they must also pass Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 with a grade 
of C or better. All majors are urged to 
enroll in History 416, Music 336, Poli- 
tical Science 220 and Theatre 335. 

A minor in German consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

IO1-I02 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, and reading with a view to 
building confidence in self-expression. Pre- 
requisite: German 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabul- 
ary building are stressed with intensive re- 
view, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues in German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension, and translation. Some atten- 
tion is given to the development of the lan- 
guage and its relationship to English. Prere- 
quisite: German 112 or equivalent. 

323 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural develop- 



41 



ments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with Mterature and 
culture from the Early Middle Ages through 
the 18th century. Prerequisite: German 222 
or consent of instructor. 

325 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural develop- 
ments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with literature and 
culture from the 19th century to the present 
Prerequisite: German 222 or consent of in- 
structor. 

41! THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 32.^ or 325 or consent of instructor. 

421 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics in- 
clude: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 323 or 32S or 
consent of instructor. 

431 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works Pre- 
requisite: German 323 or 325 or consent of 
instructor. 

433 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 
323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

441 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and dramat- 
ists of contemporary Germany, Switzerland 
and Austria covering the period from 1945 to 
the present. Readings selected from writers 
such as: Borchert. Boll, Brecht, Benn, 
Frisch, Diirrenmatt, Bichsel, Handke, 
Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in German in- 
clude Classicism, Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and 
Diirrenmatt. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 



101-102 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Greek text. Alternate years. 

221 READINGS IN THE 
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic tradition 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102 or equiva- 
lent. Alternate years. 

222 READINGS IN THE 
PAULINE EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva- 
lent. Alternate years. 



Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Hebrew text Alternate years. 

221 READINGS IN OLD 
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected narrative ponions of (he Old Testa- 
ment with special attention being given to 
exegetical questions. The text read varies 
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

222 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC 
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy 
and wisdom literature with special attention 
being given to exegetical questions. The text 
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite: 
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. .■Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 111 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 338 does not count to- 
ward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 



teaching in secondary school must pass 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 418. 
A minor in Spanish consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 



1 1 - 1 02 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate u.se in speaking, 
understanding, reading and writing with a 
view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Usually the student chooses 
from among the following areas for their 
work in building vocabulary and fluency: 
Spanish for Business and Economics. Span- 
ish for Social Services. Spanish for Law En- 
forcement. Spanish for Health Care Profes- 
sionals, or. for the student who does not plan 
to use the language for one of these specific 
career goals. Spanish for Communication. 
Pierequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 
expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or equivalent. 

311 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students (o (he Spanish- 
speaking people — their values, customs and 
institutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America Prerequisite: 
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

323 SURVEY OF SPANISH 

LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major socio-economic de- 
velopments. The course deals with the litera- 
ture from the beginning to the present. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 222 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 



42 



325 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish-American literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature, especially the essay and 
poetry, from the 16th century to the present 
Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

418 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 
written Spanish. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, pronunciation, oral and wntten 
composition, and translation. Prerequisite: 
One Spanish course at the JOO's level or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

424 SPANISH LITERATURE OF 
THE GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and princip- 
al literary figures in the poetry, prose, and 
drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 323, 325. or consent of in- 
structor. 

426 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 

Readings of important works of drama, poet- 
ry, and prose from the major periods of 1 9th 
and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 
323. 325. or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent studies include literary, linguistic, 
and cultural topics and themes such as urban 
problems as reflected in the modem novel. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



HISTORY 



Professors: Larson. Piper (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding 110, 111, and 449. At least 
seven courses must be taken in the de- 
partment. The following courses may be 
counted toward fulfilling the major re- 
quirements: American Studies 200, Poli- 
tical Science 439, Religion 226 and 228. 
Other appropriate courses outside the de- 



partment may be counted upon depart- 
mental approval. For history majors who 
student teach in history, the major con- 
sists of nine courses. In addition to the 
courses listed below, special courses, in- 
dependent study, and honors are avail- 
able. Special courses recently taught and 
anticipated include a biographical study 
of European Monarchs, the European 
Left, the Industrialization and Urbaniza- 
tion of Modem Europe, Utopian Move- 
ments in America, the Peace Movement 
in America. The Vietnam War. and 
American Legal History. History majors 
are encouraged to participate in the in- 
ternship program. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in American Histon.- History 125. 126, 
and three courses in American history 
numbered 200 and above. A minor in 
European History requires the comple- 
tion of History 110, 111, and three 
courses in European history numbered 
200 and above. To obtain a minor in 
History (without national or geographic 
designation), a student must complete 
six courses in history, of which three 
must be chosen from History 110, 111, 
125 and 126 and three must be history 
courses numbered 200 and above. 



105 SELECTED THEMES IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 

A survey of the political, economic, social. 
and cultural values and institutions in West- 
em Civilization from the time of classical 
Greece to the present. One-half unit of cre- 
dit. (Not open to students who have had His- 
tory 110 and nil. 

no EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

Ill EUROPE 1815-Present 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations withother areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present. 

120 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, the 
age of discovery and conquest . Spanish colo- 



nial policy, the independence movements, 
and the development of modem institutions 
and governments in Latin America. Alter- 
nate years. 

125 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 
A study of the men. measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in (he 
development of the United States between 
1 607 and 1 877 . Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minonty groups as well as to major- 
ity and national influences. 

126 UNITED STATES HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A study of men. measures, and movements 
which have been significant in the develop- 
ment of the United States since 1877. Atten- 
tion is paid to the problems of minority 
groups as well as to majority and national 
influences. 

210 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, includ- 
ing the foundations of the western tradition in 
Greece, the emergence and expansion of the 
Roman state, its experience as a republic, 
and its transformation into the Empire. The 
course will focus on the social and intellec- 
tual life of Greece and Rome as well as poli- 
tical and economic changes. Alternate years. 

212 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND 
ITS NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution of 
the Roman Empire to the mid- 1 5th century 
The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating 
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic 
Empire and its later fragmentation; the de- 
velopment and growth of feudalism; the con- 
flict of empire and papacy, and the rise of the 
towns. Alternate years. 

216 FRENCH REVOLUTION 
AND NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political . social . and intel- 
lectual background of the French Revolu- 
tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary 
development, and an estimate of the results 
of the Napoleonic conquests and administra- 
tion. Prerequisite: History J 10 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

218 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF 
THE WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, econo- 
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
from 1900-1945. Topics include the rise of 
irrationalism. the origins of the First World 
War. the Communist and Fascist Revolu- 
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace 
before 1939. Prerequisite: History III or 
consent of instructor. 



43 



219 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, econo- 
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco- 
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization 
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold 
War, decolonization, and the flowering of 
the welfare state. Prerequisile: History 111 
or consent of instructor. 

222 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II 

A comprehensive examination of World War 
II emphasizing the effect of ideological, eco- 
nomic, and political forces on the formula- 
tion of military strategy and the conduct of 
operation; the nature and e.Ktent of the expan- 
sion of government powers; and the experi- 
ence of war from the perspective of ordinary 
civilians and military alike. Does not count 
toward distribution. 

226 COLONIAL AMERICA AND 
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA 
The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as col- 
onies, the causes and events of the American 
Revolution, the critical period following in- 
dependence, and proposal and adoption of 
the United States Constitution. .Mternaie 
years. 

230 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation 
of Afro-Americans in the United States. The 
course includes historical experiences such 
as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and 
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the 
development and growth of white racism, 
and the effect of this racism on contemporary 
Afro-American social, intellectual, and poli- 
tical life Alternate years. 

244 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and 
social developments in the 20th century. 
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United Stales in the period following World 
War II. 

310 WOMEN IN HISTORY 

An examination of the social, political, eco- 
nomic and intellectual experience of women 
in the Western World from ancient times to 
the present. May be taken for either one-half 
unit (section 3I0A) or full unit (section 
3I0B); declared majors and prospective ma- 
jors should take the full-unit course, 3I0B. 

316 CONFLICT IN 

WESTERN CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development 
of Western Civilization since the end of the 



Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war m the development 
of the modem nation state and the origins and 
nature of total war. Alternate years. 

320 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF 
EUROPE SINCE 1789 
A survey of the development of the Euro- 
pean-slates system and the relations between 
the European slates since the beginning of 
the French Revolution. Prerequisite: History 
III or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

322 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 1 9th century Europe from 
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica- 
tion of Germany. The course centers on the 
struggles for power within the major states of 
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of 
nationalism was used to bring about one type 
of solution. Alternate years. 

328 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 
The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modem America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson 
receive special attention. Special considera- 
tion is given to the first and .second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness. the westward movement, and the grow- 
ing importance of the family as a unit of 
social organization. Alternate years. 

332 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war. the 
political and military history of the war. and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 
1877. 

340 20TH CENTURY 

UNITED STATES RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relate to 
religion or what is commonly called religion 
This involves consideration of the institu- 
tional and intellectual development of sever- 
al faith groups as well as discussion of certain 
problems, such as the persistence of religious 
bigotry and the changing modes of church- 
state relationships. Alternate years. 

416 HISTORY OF 

REFORMATION THOUGHT 
A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its inception, 
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in- 
volved in the formulation of the major Re- 
formation Protestant traditions, and in the 
Catholic Refomiation. Included are the ideas 



of the humanists of the Reformation Era. 
Alternate years. 

418 HISTORY OF 

RENAISSANCE THOUGHT 
A study of the classical, humanist, and scho- 
lastic elements involved in the development 
of the Renaissance outlook on views and 
values, both in Italy and in Northem Europe. 
The various combinations of social and poli- 
tical circumstances which constitute the his- 
torical context of these intellectual develop- 
ments will be noted. Alternate years. 

442 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 
antecedents through reconstmction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, trans- 
cendentalism, community life and organiza- 
tion, education, and social-reform move- 
ments. Prerequisites: two courses from His- 
tory 125. 126. 230. or consent of instructor. 

443 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstmction 
to the present day. Among the topics consi- 
dered are social Darwinism, pragmatism, 
community life and organization, education 
and social reform movements. Prere- 
quisites: two courses from History 125. 126, 
230. or consent of instructor. 

449 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and mean- 
ing of history. It will open to the student 
different historical approaches and will pro- 
vide the opportunity to explore these 
approaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this 
course in either their junior or senior year. 
The course is open to other students who 
have two courses in history or consent of 
instmctor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically, history interns work for local gov- 
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro- 
jects or for the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immigra- 
tion of American blacks, political dissension 
in the Weimer Republic. Indian relations be- 
fore the American Revolution, and the his- 
tory of Lycoming County. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index! 



44 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment of 
Europe today with study of Europe in its 
relations to the rest of the world, particu- 
larly the United States. It stresses the 
international relations of the North 
Atlantic community and offers the stu- 
dent opportunity to emphasize either 
European studies or international rela- 
tions. The program provides multiple 
perspectives on the cultural traits that 
shape popular attitudes and institutions. 
Study of a single country is included as a 
data-base for comparisons, and study of 
its language, as a basis for direct com- 
munication with its people. 

The program is intended to prepare a 
student either for graduate study or for 
careers which have an international com- 
ponent. International obligations are in- 
creasingly assumed by government 
agencies and a wide range of business, 
social, religious, and educational orga- 
nizations. Opportunities are found in the 
fields of journalism, publishing, com- 
munications, trade, banking, advertis- 
ing, management, and tourism. The 
program also offers flexible career pre- 
paration in a variety of essential skills, 
such as research, data analysis, report 
writing, languge skills, and the aware- 
ness necessary for dealing with people 
and institutions of another culture. Pre- 
paration for related careers can be 
obtained through the guided selection of 
courses outside the major in the areas of 
business, economics, foreign languages 
and literatures, government, history, and 
international relations or through a 
second major. Students should design 
their programs in consultation with 
members of the Committee on Interna- 
tional Studies. 

By completing six to eight additional 
courses in the social sciences (which in- 
clude those courses needed to complete a 
major in economics, history, political 
science, or sociology/anthropology) and 



the required program in eduction, stu- 
dents can be certified for the teacher 
education program in social studies. By 
completing a major in the foreign lan- 
guage (five or more courses) and the 
education program, students can be certi- 
fied to teach that language. The Interna- 
tional Studies program also encourages 
participation in study-abroad programs, 
as well as the Washington and United 
Nations semesters. 

The major includes 1 1 courses 
selected as follows: 

International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed to 
provide a basic understanding of the in- 
ternational system and of Europe's rela- 
tions with the rest of the world. Political 
Science 225 is required. 

Political Science 225: World Politics 
Economics 443: International Trade 
Historj- 320: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 439: American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses (if 
two, then four must be taken from Inter- 
national Relations Courses). Courses 
within this group are designed to provide 
a basic understanding of the European 
political, social, and economic environ- 
ment. History 111 and Economics 221 
are required. 

History 111: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 221: Comparative Economic 

Systems 
Political Science 220: European Politics 
History 2 1 8: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 219: Contemporary Europe 

National Courses 

Language — Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 221. plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 2281 

German 221. plus one course numbered 222 or 

above 

Spanish 221. plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 311) 



Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her lan- 
guage preparation, one European coun- 
try' which will serve as a special interest 
area throughout the program. The coun- 
try selected will serve as the base for 
individual projects in the major courses 
wherever possible. 

France — French 228: Modem France 
Germany — History N80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture 

Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international rela- 
tions courses not yet taken. History 110. 
316; Economics 226; Political Science 
326. 327. 438; related foreign-literature 
courses counting toward the fine-arts re- 
quirement and internships. 

Senior Seminar 

449 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students 
will work to some extent independently. 
Guest speakers will be invited. The seminar 
will be open to qualified persons from out- 
side the major and the College. Prerequisite: 
consent of instructor. 



LITERATURE 

Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of En- 
glish. French. German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two literatures 
widely and intensively at the upper levels 
of course offerings within each of the 
respective departments while developing 
and applying skills in foreign languages. 
The major prepares students for graduate 
study in either of the two literatures stu- 
died or in comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 



45 



ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisors (nor- 
mally courses numbered 200 and above 
in English and 400 and above in foreign 
languges). In general, two of the adv- 
anced courses in each literature should be 
period courses. The third course, taken 
either as a regular course or an indepen- 
dent study, may have as its subject 
another period, a particular author, 
genre, or literary theme, or some other 
unifying approach or idea. Beyond these 
six, the major must include at least two 
additional courses from among those 
counting toward a major in the depart- 
ments involved. Any prerequisite 
courses in the respective departments 
(for example: English 106, French 221- 
222 or 228, German 221-222, Spanish 
221-222) should be taken during the 
freshman year. Students should design 
their programs in consultation with a 
faculty member from each of the litera- 
tures concerned. Programs for the major 
must be approved by the departments 
involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 

Assistant Professor: Nason 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructors: Beauge, Sawyer, 

Whitehill, Winiarczk 

The interdisciplinary major in Mass 
Communication recognizes the need for 
a liberal arts foundation and requires 
selected courses from the Departments of 
Art, Business Administration, English, 
Political Science, Psychology, and 
Sociology/Anthropology. The major 
combines a core of Mass Communica- 
tion courses with one of three profession- 
al tracks: Advertising/Public Relations, 
Broadcast Journalism, and Journalism. 
Emphasis is placed on developing an 
understanding of the cultural and histor- 
ical roles of the mass media and on de- 
veloping the communicative skills 
necessary for careers in the media. 

Students majoring in Mass Com- 



munication must complete the Core Cur- 
riculum and one professional track. Each 
track requires a combination of theory, 
production, and writing courses. 

A minor in Mass Communication con- 
sists of Mass Communication 110, 211, 
215, and three of the following courses: 
Mass Communication 224, 329, 330, 
331, 448. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 
Mass Ccimm 21.'^ Iniroduction to 

Media Wnlinf! 
Mass Conim I 10 Inlroductiim lo 

Mass Conimunicalion 
Mass Coium 21 I Fundamenlals ol 

Oral Communication 
Mass Comm .V^d Theories and Issues 

in Mass Communication 
Mass Comm ^M Mass Media Law 

and Regulalion 
Pol Sci 44X Public Opinion 

and Pollinf!' 
Mass Comm 247. 24X. 244 Practicum in 

(one credit each) Mass Communication 

*Business44.'i (Marketing Research), Psychol- 
ogy 224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447 
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be sub- 
stituted. These courses require departmental 
prerequisites or consent of individual instruc- 
tors. 

Students must complete the require- 
ments of one of the following profession- 
al tracks: 



Track I — Advertising/Public Relations 

Business 228 Marketing Management I 

Business 332 Advertising 

English 329 Business and 

Publicity Writing 

One of the following writing courses: 
English 216 Writing for Special Audiences 
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Two of the following production courses: 
Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

An 227 Introduction to Photography 

GCO 511 Layout and Design (WACO 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 

Track II — Journalism 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

GCO 511 Layout and Design (WACO 

Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government 

One of the following additional writing 
courses: 



Mass Comm 329 
Pol Sci 434 



Broadcast Journalism 
Political Newswriting 



One of the following courses: 
History 126 United States History, 

1877-present 
Philosophy 1 15 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 
Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and 

Cultural Minorities* 
'Requires prerequisite or consent of in- 
structor 

Track III — Broadcast Journalism 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programing 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 
Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 
Pol Sci 111 Slate and Local Government 
Pol Sci 434 Political Newswriting 

One of the following courses: 
History 126 United States History, 

1877-present 
Philosophy 115 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 
Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and 

Cultural Minorities* 
'Requires a prerequisite or consent of in- 
structor 

110 INTRODUCTION TO 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Theories of the process of mass communica- 
tion and introduction lo the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of cen- 
sorship and media ethics. Analysis of the 
mass media's impact on society; emphasis 
will be placed on the social, psychological, 
and political implications of the media's 
shaping influence on man and institutions 

211 FUNDAMENTALS OF 

ORAL COMMUNICATION 
The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lectures, 
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor- 
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape 
sequences for feedback to students. 

215 INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA 
WRITING 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms of 
media writing: the elements of lead, style and 
structure. Frequent workshop sessions for 
detailed critiques and discussion of student 
writing . Prerequisites: A grade ofC or belter 
in English 106 or consent of the instri4Ctor. 

218 RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 
Contemporary broadcast programming tech- 
niques including station scheduling, prog- 



46 



ram development and analysis, and imple- 
mentation in real and hypothetical situations. 
Emphasis on management functions. 

224 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use ol basic equipment to produce stan- 
dard lormats on videotape. 

247-249 PRACTICUM IN 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques and skills in an applied set- 
ling through work experience, primarily 
with campus media Students will write, 
produce and report news for print (Mass 
Comm 2471. radio (Mass Comm 24X) and 
television (Mass Comm 249) outlets. Oni- 
hiiiir cri'ilil. SIU /•rculc. One mil) he 
repeaU'd oiuc for iretlil. Limit of one hintr 
credit per \emcMcr. Prerequisite: Cimsent 
of the tn\tritctor. 

yu PRINT JOURNALISM 

Techniques in reporting news and trends at 
the local, regional, and county levels; 
emphasis on writing the longer news and 
feature article, the editorial, and the investi- 
gative news story. Prerequisite: A i>rii<le ol 
C or better in Mass Communiiation 215 or 
consent ol the instructor. 

.^29 BROADCAST JOURNALISM 

Study of. and practical experience in. the 
newsgathering process for electronic media 
Emphasis on covering the local story from 
the small-station perspective Students in 
the course are responsible for writing, pro- 
ducing, editing and broadcasting newscasts 
for WRLC-FM The course also looks at the 
special ethical problems of electronic news 
coverage. Prerequisites: Eni^lisli 215 iinil 
Muss Communu (itiini 2 IS or consent ol 
instructor 

yyo THEORIES AND ISSUES IN 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
An analysis of current theories dealing with 
mass communication systems and the 
behavior and attitudes of. and effects on. 
their audiences. The course also examines 
contemporary mass media issues with an 
emphasis on developing critical thinking 
skills. Prerequisite: Mass Comm 1 10. 

-^.M MASS MEDIA LAW 
AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listeil as Political Sci- 
ence 43 f). Prerequisite: junior or senior 
stamlinii or consent of instructor. 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a held 
related to their communication sequence. 
Prerequisite: Four semesters of Mass Cimi- 
munication Practicuni or consent ol the 
instructor. 

NX()-NX9 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following course offered at the Williams- 
port Area Community College is avail- 
able only to students in the Mass Com- 
munication major and in the Art Track III 
major in Commercial Design. The 
WACC course is taken as part of the 
student's schedule and is listed with 
Lycoming offerings during registration 
periods. 

."ill LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley, 

Sprechini 
Assistant Professors; Bucki, DeSilva, 

Ryan, Weida 
Part-time Instructor: Davis 

The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in computer 
science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of II courses: Mathematics 116, 128, 
and 129, and Computer Science 125, 
246, 247. 321, 344, 445, and two other 
computer science courses numbered 320 
or above. Recommended extradepart- 
mental courses: Physics 229, Philosophy 
225, and Psychology 337. In addition to 
the regular courses listed below, special 
courses are occasionallv available. 



A minor in Computer Science consists 
of Computer Science 246, 247, and two 
other computer science courses num- 
bered 220 or above. 

108 MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM SOLVING 
WITH MICROCOMPUTERS 

An introduction to the use of microcomputer- 
based, integrated software in solving prob- 
lems from mathematics and related areas. 
Included are uses of spreadsheet, data-base 
and graphics functions to analyze, solve, and 
display solutions to problems from the areas 
of number theory, algebra, geometry, statis- 
tics, and the mathematics of business and 
finance. Emphasis is given to the processes 
involved in mathematical modeling. Labora- 
tory experience is included using current 
software. Prerequisite: Credit for or exemp- 
tion from Mathematics 005. 

125 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 
Introduction to programming and software 
utilities. Topics include algorithms, program 
structure, computer configuration, memory 
allocation, and an exposure to application 
packages. Laboratory experience is in- 
cluded, most recently using OMSI Pascal, 
the MiniCalc spreadsheet, and RUNOFF, a 
text formatting package. Prerequisite: credit 
for or e.xemption from Mathematics 005 . 

246 PRINCIPLES OF 
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 
Pnnciples of effective programming, includ- 
ing structured programming, stepwise re- 
finement, assertion proving, style, debug- 
ging, control structure, decision tables, finite 
state machines, recursion, and encoding. 
Utilities most recently used include SVS Pas- 
cal, the UNIX operating systems. C. and 
Shell programming. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Computer Science 125 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

247 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms 
associated with data structures. Topics in- 
clude representation of lists, trees, graphs 
and strings, algorithms for searching and 
sorting. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better 
in Computer Science 246 or consent of in- 
structor. Corequisile: Mathematics 116. 

32 1 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, ma- 
trix inversion, and the eigenvalue prob- 
lem. Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 
and Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 
strongly recommended 



47 



344 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and representa- 
tion of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt 
programming, relocatable code, linkmg 
loaders; interfacing with operating systems. 
Prerequisite: a grade ofC or heller in Com- 
piiier Science 246 or consent of instructor. 

345 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER GRAPHICS 

An introduction to graphics hardware and 
software with emphasis on the mathematics 
necessary to represent, transform, and dis- 
play images of two and three dimensional 
objects. Laboratory exercises will be de- 
signed to explore the capabilities of the 
graphics system and to test the students' 
understanding of the principles discussed in 
class. Prerequisite: Computer Science 246 
and either Computer Science 247 or permis- 
sion of the instructor: Mathematics I JO re- 
commended. Alternate years. 

349 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, in- 
dexed files; relational, network, and hierar- 
chical data models; relational algebra and the 
relational calculus; design theory for re- 
lational databases; query optimization; con- 
current operations; database protection. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 247. Alternate 
years. 

445 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algor- 
ithms used in programming the various parts 
of a computer system. These pans include 
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt pro- 
cessors, input/output schedulers, processor 
and job schedulers, and memory managers. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247 and 
344. 

446 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming lan- 
guages. Topics include lexical analysis. 
block structure, grammars, parsing, program 
representation, and run-time organization. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. Alter- 
nate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 



unit courses in the mathematical sciences 
and four semesters of non-credit collo- 
quia: Computer Science 125, Mathema- 
tics 128, 129, 130. 234, 238, 432, 434, 
and two other mathematics courses num- 
bered 220 or above, one of which may be 
replaced by Mathematics 112, 116, or 
214; four semesters of Mathematics 339 
or 439 taken during the junior and senior 
years. 

Majors are required to attend the collo- 
quia during their junior and senior years 
(339 and 449 respectively). (Seniors are 
strongly encouraged to give their pre- 
sentations during the fall semester.) Stu- 
dents applying for the professional 
semester in education are required to 
give the first presentation before the 
eighth week of the spring semester of 
their junior year and the second presenta- 
tion before the eighth week of the fall 
semester of their senior year. With De- 
partmental approval, students will be re- 
quired to take only three semesters of 339 
and 449; such approval is granted only in 
extraordinary circumstances and will re- 
quire the student to give one presentation 
in each of three semesters. 

Students seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in mathematics are required to com- 
plete Mathematics 330 and 336 and are 
advised to enroll in Philosophy 117. 
Also, all majors are advised to elect Phi- 
losophy 225 and 333, Physics 225 and 
226. 

In addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 
available. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 234, 238. and two other 
courses numbered 220 or above. 

005 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal 
numerals, fractions, the real number line, 
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic 
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic 
functions, expressions with rational expo- 
nents, algebraic functions, exponential func- 
tions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS DE- 
PARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 

103 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 

Empirical distributions of measurements. 



probability and random variables, discrete 
and continuous probability distributions, sta- 
tistical inference from small samples, linear 
regression and correlation, analysis of enum- 
erative data. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 005. 

105 MATHEMATICS IN 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

This course is intended for prospective 
elementary school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, en- 
vironmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation in 
Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Corequisite: any education course numbered 
341 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of in- 
structor. 

107 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo- 
nometric, polynomial, and rational func- 
tions, their graphs, and elementary prop- 
erties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. 

109 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 
cepts with applications to business, biology, 
and social-science problems. Not open to 
students who have completed Mathematics 
128. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. Alternate years. 

112 FINITE MATHEMATICS 
FOR DECISION MAKING 
An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calcu- 
lus, which are used in business administra- 
tion, social sciences, and operations re- 
search. The course will include both determi- 
nistic models such as graphs, networks, 
linear programming and voting models, and 
probabilistic models such as Markov chains 
and games. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 005. 

1 16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. 
Topics include equivalence relations, parti- 
tions and quotient sets, mathematical induc- 
tion, recursive functions, elementary logic. 
discrete number systems, elementary com- 
binatorial theory, and general algebraic 
structures emphasizing semi-groups, 
groups, lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs 
and trees. Prerequisite: Computer Science 
125 or consent of instructor. 

128 CALCULUS WITH 

ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I 
Differentiation of algebraic functions. 



48 



graphing plane curves, applications to re- 
lated rale and extremal problems, integration 
of algebraic functions, areas of plane re- 
gions, volumes of solids or revolution, and 
other applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 107 or consent of 
instructor. 

129 CALCULUS WITH 
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY II 
Differentiation and integration of transcen- 
dental functions, parametric equations, polar 
coordinates, the conic sections and their ap- 
plications, infinite sequences, and series ex- 
pansions. Prerequisite: a grade ofC or bel- 
ter in Mathematics 128 or consent of in- 
structor. 

1 30 INTRODUCTION TO 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Systems of linear equations and matrix arith- 
metic. Points and hyperplanes in dimension- 
al geometries. Bases and linear independ- 
ence. Matrix representations of linear map- 
pings. The fixed point problem. Special clas- 
ses of matrices. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
107 or its equivalent. 

214 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques in- 
clude analysis of variance . analysis of covar- 
iance, multiple regression and correlation, 
factor anaylsis and canonical correlations, 
contingency tables, discriminative analysis, 
and non-parametric techniques. Further 
topics will be chosen from cluster analysis, 
time series analysis, and repeated measure 
analysis. Extensive use of a statistical pack- 
age is made (currently BMDPl. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 103 or its equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

23 1 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and linear systems Solution techniques in- 
clude: reduction of order, undertermined 
coefficients, variation of parameters, La- 
place transforms, power series, and eigenva- 
lues and eigenvectors. A brief discussion of 
numerical methods may also be included. 
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in 
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 recom- 
mended. 

233 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com- 
plex integration. Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics 
238. Alternate years. 

234 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 



reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a 
bridge from elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 129 or consent of in- 
structor. 

238 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS 

Algebra, geometry, and calculus in multi- 
dimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples, mat- 
rices; lines, planes, curves, surfaces; vector 
functions of a single variable, acceleration, 
curvature; functions of several variables, 
gradient; line integrals, vector fields, multi- 
ple integrals, change of variable, areas, 
volumes; Green's theorem. Prerequisites: a 
grade of C or better in Mathematics 129. 
Mathematics 130 or consent of instructor. 

321 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, matrix 
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 strongly 
recommended. 

330 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean 
geometry, and an introduction to related 
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128. 
Alternate years. 

332-333 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS MI 

A study of probability, discrete and con- 
tinuous random variables, expected values 
and moments, sampling, point estimation, 
sampling distributions, interval estimation, 
test of hypotheses, regression and linear 
hypotheses, experimental design models. 
Corequisite: Mathematics 238. Alternate 
years. 

336 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 
A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the 
mathematics that form the foundation of 
secondary mathematics. Ideas will be pre- 
sented to familianze the student with various 
curriculum proposals, to provide for innova- 
tion within the existing curriculum, and to 
expand the boundaries of the existing curri- 
culum. Open only to junior and senior 
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon- 
dary-education program. Alternate years. 



338 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory. Including simulation tech- 
niques; optimization theory, including linear 
programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory , includ- 
ing two-person zero-sum games, cooperative 
games, and multiperson games. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathematics 
130. Alternate years. 

432 REAL ANALYSIS 

An introduction to the rigorous analysis of 
the concepts of real variable calculus in the 
setting of normed spaces. Topics from: 
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete- 
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel 
theorem; functions on Euclidean space, con- 
tinuity, uniform continuity, differentiability; 
series and convergence; Riemann integral. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 234 and 238. 

434 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings, 
fields, and vector spaces and functions which 
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 130 and 234. 

438 SEMINAR 

Topics in modern mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor, A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is de- 
signed to provide junior and senior mathema- 
tics majors and other qualified students with 
more than the usual opportunity for concen- 
trated and cooperative Inquiry. Prerequisite: 
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit. 
This course may be repeated for credit. 

339 & 449 MATHEMATICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for junior 
and senior mathematics majors offers stu- 
dents a chance to hear presentations on topics 
related to but not directly covered in formal 
mathematics courses. Students are required 
to attend colloquia each semester of their 
junior (339) and senior (449) years. 
Mathematics majors must present two lec- 
tures, one during the junior year and one 
during the senior year, A letter grade will be 
given in semesters in which the student gives 
a presentation; otherwise the grade will be 
S/U, Non-credit course. One hour per week, 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



49 



MUSIC 



Associate Professors: Boerckel 

(Chairperson), Thayer 
Assistant Professor: Jeffers 
Part-time Instructors: Bailey, Clark, 
Feist. Guth, Lakey, Muzzo, 
Nacinovich, Raessler, Russell, 
Swope, White, and Zdzienski 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of music theory, his- 
tory, applied and ensemble. A minimum 
of eight courses (exclusive of all ensem- 
ble, applied music and instrumental and 
vocal methods courses) is required and 
must include Music 110, 111, 220, 221, 
335 and 336. Each major must partici- 
pate in an ensemble (Music 167. 168 
and/or 1 69) and take one hour of applied 
music per week for a minimum of four 
semesters including the entire period in 
which the individual is registered as a 
music major (see Music 160-169). The 
major must include at least one-half hour 
of piano in the applied program unless a 
piano proficiency test is requested and 
passed. Anyone declaring music as a 
second major must do so by the begin- 
ning of the junior year. 

Music majors seeking certification in 
music education (K-12) must also take 
Psychology 1 10 and 338; Education 200 
and the Professional Semester; Music 
261-7, 331, 332, 446 and pass the piano 
proficiency examination. Students who 
wish to obtain certification in music 
education should consult with the depart- 
ment as soon as possible, preferably be- 
fore scheduling classes for the freshman 
year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from the 
following list to meet distribution re- 
quirements: Music 1 16. 117; Music 1 18, 
119; Music 113 or Music 224 in com- 
bination with 116, 117, 1 18 or 1 19. 

Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students qual- 
ified in performance may present formal 
recitals. 



110-111 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all students. 
An e.\amination of the fundamental compo- 
nents and theoretical concepts of music. The 
student will develop musicianship through 
application of applied skills. (Music I lU n 
prerequisite to Music III). 

113 MUSIC OF TODAY 

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques 
and contents of music produced since I9.'i0. 
w ith emphasis on developments in electronic 
music. Leading figures of major contempor- 
ary movements in music, literature and the 
visual arts and their works will be presented 
and discussed in relation to musical culture. 
The course will include some practical expo- 
sure to the electronic music studio and re- 
cording techniques. 

116 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and techni- 
ques of music. Examples drawn from various 
periods and styles are designed to enhance 
perception and appreciation through careful 
and informed listening. 

1 1 7 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of music in Western 
civilization from Middle Ages to the present 
Composers and musical styles are considered 
in the context of the broader culture of each 
major era. 

118 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of Amencan music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through World War 
I. Areas explored will include Indian. .\in- 
can, and European roots influencing the se- 
rious music for small and large ensembles. 
the development of show music from min- 
strels to Broadway musicals, the evolution of 
"Tin Pan Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. 
Aliernale years - 

119 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. Amer- 
ican Music II will cover post-world War I 
days to the present. Areas explored will in- 
clude indigenous serious music for small and 
large ensembles, the mature Broadway 
musical, the evolution of jazz, the develop- 
ment of rock, and the fusion of musical styles 
in the I970's. Aliernale \ears. 

220-221 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
course moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music 111. 

224 ELECTRONIC MUSIC 1 

Technical introduction to synthesizer studio 
techniques. Topics will Include musical 



acoustics, basic recording, sound generation 
and modification devices and the analysis of 
relevant examples in popular and avant- 
garde styles. Students will produce synthe- 
sized tape projects during assigned studio 
hours, Aliernale years. 

22.S ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

Further consideration of recording techni- 
ques. Use of microphones, multi-track re- 
cording, mixing, special effects devices and 
synchronization will be introduced. Students 
will take part in live recording of concerts 
and rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. 
Student projects will include complete re- 
cording sessions and the production of elec- 
tronic music compositions utilizing classical 
studio techniques and real-time networks. 
Prerequisite: Music 224 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

330 COMPOSITION I 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and in- 
strumental forms. Students identify and use 
the techniques employed by major compos- 
ers of the 20th century. Prerequisite: Music 
1 1 1 or consent of instructor. 

33 1 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical ex- 
perience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience possi- 
ble. Prerequisite: Music 110-111 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 



332 TEACHING MUSIC IN THE SCHOOLS 
Methods and materials of teaching music in 
the schools with emphasis on curriculum de- 
velopment and procedures for choral and in- 
strumental ensembles at the elementary and 
secondary levels. Course work will include 
observation of music classes in elementary 
and secondary schools in the greater Wil- 
liamsport area. Alternate years. 

335 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Gregorian chant through Mozan. in- 
cluding composers from the medieval. Re- 
naissance, baroque and early classical eras. 

336 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II 
The development of musical styles and forms 
from Beethoven to the present, including 
composers from the late classical, romantic 
and modem eras. 

339 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modem orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in instm- 
mentation. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience possi- 
ble. Prerequisite: Music 1 10-11 1 or consent 



50 



of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 COMPOSITION II 

Creative writing in larger vocal and in- 
strumental forms. Students write more ex- 
tended works in order to develop an indi- 
vidual style of composition. Prerequisite: 
Music 330 or consent of instructor. 

442 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC 

Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro- 
duction. Notation systems for electronic 
music. Aesthetics of electronic music. Stu- 
dents will use the full resources of the studio 
to complete original compositions and will 
study, prepare and present works by major 
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite: 
Music 225 or consent of instructor. 

445 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC 

The intensive study of a selected area of 
music literature, designed to develop re- 
search techniques in music. The topic is 
announced at the Spring pre-registration. 
Sample topics include: Beethoven, Impress- 
ionism, Vienna 1900-1914. Prerequisite: 
Music 116. 117 or 221 or consent of in- 
structor. 

446 RECITAL 

The preparation and presentation of a full- 
length public recital, normally during the 
student's senior year. Prerequisite: approval 
by the department. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 



N80-N89 



INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of perfoimance in piano, 
harpsichord, voice, organ, strings, 
guitar, brass, woodwinds, and percus- 
sion is designed to develop sound techni- 
que and a icnowledge of the appropriate 
literature for the instrument. Student re- 
citals offer opportunities to gain experi- 
ence in public performance. 

Credit for applied music courses (pri- 
vate lessons) and ensemble (choir, 
orchestra and band) is earned on a frac- 
tional basis. One half-hour lesson per 
week earns Vi hour credit; one hour les- 
son per week earns one hour credit. En- 
semble credit totals one hour credit if a 
student enrolls for one or two ensembles 
(for more information, see course de- 



scriptions below). When scheduling 
please note that an applied course or en- 
semble should not be substituted for an 
academic course, but should be taken in 
addition to the normal four academic 
courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows; 
$145 per semester for a half-hour lesson 
per week. $290 per semester for an hour 
lesson per week. Private lessons are 
given for 13 weeks. 
160 Piano or Harpsichord. 161 Voice, 
162 Strings or Guitar, 163 Organ. 164 
Brass, 165 Woodwinds, 166 Percussion. 

167 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra 
allows students with significant instrumental 
expenence to become members of this re- 
gional ensemble. Participation in the 
W.S.O. is contingent upon audition and the 
availability of openings. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is enrol- 
led in orchestra only should register for 
Music 167B (one hour credit). A student may 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Choir or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music I67A ('/: hour credit) plus either 
Music 1 68 A ( '/: hour credit) or Music 169.A 
{'A hour credit). 

168 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 

Participation in the College choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least 
average talent an opportunity to study choral 
technique. Emphasis is placed upon ac- 
quaintance with choral literature, tone pro- 
duction, diction, and phrasing. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is enrol- 
led in Choir only should register for Music 
I68B (one hour credit). A student may be- 
long to two ensembles, choosing either 
Orchestra or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student w ill then register for 
Music 168A ('/; hour credit) plus either 
Music 167 A ( '/: hour credit) or Music 169A 
('/2 hour credit). If a student has auditioned 
and been selected for the twenty voice Cham- 
ber Choir (no credit available), he she should 
register for Music 168C. 

169 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND) 

The College Wind Ensemble allows students 
with some instrumental experience to be- 
come acquainted with good band literature 
and develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activity. 
Students are allowed a maximum of one hour 



of Ensemble credit per semester. A student 
who is enrolled in Band only should register 
for Music 169B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Orchestra or Choir as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 169A ( '/: hour credit) plus either 
Music 167A ('/: hour credit) or Music 168A 
('/: hour credit). 

INSTRUMENTAL AND VOCAL 
METHODS 

Instrumental and vocal methods classes are 
dsigned to provide students seeking certifica- 
tion in music education with a basic under- 
standing of all standard band and orchestral 
instruments as well as a familiarity with fun- 
damental techniques of singing. 

Music 261: Brass Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 262; Percussion Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 263. 264: String Methods I and II 
(one hour credit each) 

Music 265: Vocal Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 266. 267: Woodwind Methods 1 
and II (one hour credit each! 



NEAR EAST CULTURE 
AND ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor; Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to ac- 
quaint students with the "cradle of West- 
em civilization," both in its ancient and 
modem aspects. Majors will complete a 
minimum of eight to ten courses related 
to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in their 
departmental sections and include; 

1 . Four courses in language and culture 
from; 

History and Culture of the Ancient 
Near East (Religion 228) 
History of Art (Art 222) 
Ancient History (History 210) 
Old Testament Faith and History 
(Religion 113) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 224) 
Two semesters of foreign language 
(Hebrew 101-102, or Greek 101-102) 

2. Two courses in archaeology from: 
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226) 
Special Archaeology courses, such as 
independent studies or in May or 



51 



summer terms in the Near East. 
3. Two courses in the cooperating de- 
partments (art, history, pohtical science, 
religion and sociology-anthropology) or 
related departments. These two courses, 
usually taken in the junior or senior 
years, can be independent study. Topics 
should be related either to the ancient or 
the modern Near East and must be 
approved in advance by the committee 
supervising the interdisciplinary prog- 
ram. The study of modern Arabic or 
Hebrew is encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by the 
supervisory committee within the limits 
of a 10-course major. The number of 
courses taken within this program applic- 
able toward fulfilling the College dis- 
tribution requirements will vary accord- 
ing to the selection of courses. 

NURSING 

Assistant Professors: Gingrow, 
Pagana, Parrish (Chairperson) 

Instructors; Atkinson, Auker, 
Dunkelberger, Ficca, 
Gray-Vickrey 

Part-time Instructors: Bird, McKeegan 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under the 
usual admission procedures. Freshmen 
should follow the nursing curriculum 
plan for the freshman year in the sequ- 
ence designated. To be considered for 
continuation in nursing, a minimum 
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion 
of the freshman year. A supplementary 
application should be submitted to the 
Department of Nursing by January 30 of 
the freshman year. 

Registered Nurses 

The Department of Nursing offers an 
alternative curriculum for registered 
nurses within the existing BSN program. 
The goals of this alternative curriculum 
are to provide registered nurses with the 
opportunity to earn an educationally 
sound BSN degree while completing the 
degree requirements in as short a time 



period as possible, and to meet the uni- 
que needs of registered nurses. Nursing 
300 and 310 are open only to registered 
nurses and are required as part of the 
alternative curriculum. Registered 
nurses may challenge for credit the fol- 
lowing nursing courses: Nursing 220, the 
skills component of Nursing 22 1 . the ob- 
stetrical component of Nursing 330, 33 1 , 
332, 334, and 440. For successful chal- 
lenge of any clinical nursing course by 
registered nurses, a grade of C- or better 
is required; that is, 70% or 1.67 is re- 
quired in both the theoretical and clinical 
components of the course. 

In addition, registered nurses in this 
program may challenge for credit any 
required nonnursing course provided that 
they obtain the permission of both the 
Department of Nursing and the depart- 
ment in which that course is offered. 
These examinations may not be available 
for every required course. 

Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking the BSN is available from 
the Department of Nursing. Individual 
advisement is offered to all registered 
nurses. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportun- 
ity for self-learning is provided in the 
adjacent Learning Center which is equip- 
ped with electronic study carrels and au- 
dio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agencies 
in the surrounding area are utilized for 
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos- 
pitals and agencies include: Divine Pro- 
vidence Hospital, Williamsport Hospital 
and Medical Center, Evangelical Hospit- 
al, Geisinger Medical Center, Leader 
Nursing Home and Rehabilitation Cen- 
ter, Danville State Hospital, Pennsylva- 
nia Department of Health, Regional 
Home Health Services, and The Wil- 
liamsport Home. 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their own 
transportation to assigned clinical areas. 
The student of nursing assumes all finan- 
cial obligations listed in the section on 



fees in this bulletin including a $40 lab 
fee for each of the clinical nursing 
courses (Nursing 221. 310. 330. 331, 
332. 333. 440 and 441). Additional ex- 
penses include uniforms, name pin. 
watch with second hand, bandage scis- 
sors, stethoscope, blood pressure cuff, 
liability insurance, annual health ex- 
aminations, and standardized achieve- 
ment tests. 

Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332. 333, 
334, 336. 435. 440. 441. 442. and nurs- 
ing elective (420. 422. or 433) or N80- 
N89. In addition, the following are pre- 
requisites for specific nursing courses: 
Chemistry 10, 115; Biology 113-114, 
226; Psychology 110. 117; Mathematics 
103. and Computer Science elective 
CPTR 108, 125, or Math 214. The reli- 
gion/philosophy distribution require- 
ment is met by the required courses: Phi- 
losophy 219 and Religion 120. The his- 
tory/social science distribution require- 
ment is met by the required courses: 
Psychology 1 10 and 117. In addition, the 
student is required to take one course 
from among Sociology/Anthropology 
1 10, 1 14, 220, 222, 224, 227, 228, 229, 
33 1 , 334, and 335. The fine arts/foreign 
language distribution requirement can be 
met by two courses in one department 
from among art, literature, music, or 
theatre; or by two courses in foreign lan- 
guage on the intermediate or higher 
course level. 

School Nurse Certification 

The Department of Nursing, in col- 
laboration with the Department of 
Education, offers an additional curricu- 
lum for the Registered Nurse with a 
Bachelors degree (or a Lycoming Col- 
lege nursing student) who wishes to be 
certified as a school nurse. The goal of 
this program is to provide the RN with a 
Bachelors degree an opportunity for 
career mobility. Courses required for 
completion of the certification program 
consist of: Education 300 and 239, Phi- 
losophy 217, Psychology 338, and Nurs- 
ing 420. 422. 430. and 43 1 . In addition. 



52 



the following are prerequisites for speci- 
fic courses: Psychology 110 and 117, 
Sociology ****, and Nur 220. 

Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking School Nurse Certifica- 
tion is available from the Department of 
Nursing. Individualized advisement is 
offered to all prospective School Nurse 
candidates. 

Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following poli- 
cies are specific to all declared majors in 
the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C — or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to continue in 
the nursing program. These courses are 
Nursing 221, 310. 330, 331, 332, 333. 
440 and 44 1 . Students who earn a grade 
of less than 70 percent or 1 .67 in either 
the theoretical or clinical component of a 
nursing course will be required to repeat 
both components of the course before 
being permitted to continue in the nurs- 
ing sequence. 

2. Policies regarding absence from clas- 
ses or from the clinical portion of nursing 
courses are determined by the instruc- 
tors) responsible for the course. No abs- 
ence from the clinical portion of the 
course will be excused other than for 
illness or family emergency with one ex- 
ception. In individual cases, students 
may make arrangements with instructors 
to be excused for extracurricular activi- 
ties. Excessive absences for any reason 
will necessitate repeating the entire 
course. 

Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 108*(Inorganic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. 106 (Composition) 1 

Psych, no* (Intro to Psych.) ... 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 



Spring 

Chem. 1 15*(Brief Organic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. Elective 1 

Psych. 1 17*(Developmental 

Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education _0^ 



SOPHOMORE YEAR 



Fall 






Bio. 113 


(Anatomy and 
Physiology) 


1 


Computer 


Science Elective** 




Nur. 220 


(Concepts of 
Nutrition in 






Family Health) 


.75 


Rel. 120 


(Death and Dying) . 


1 




3.75 


Spring 
Bio. 114 


(Anatomy and 
Physiology) 


1 


Math 103 


(Intro, to 
Statistics) 


1 


Bio. 226 


(Microbiology for 
Health Sciences) ... 


1 


Nur. 221 


(Foundations of 
Professional 






Practice) 


1.25 



JUNIOR YEAR 



Nur. 


330 


Nur. 


332 


Nur. 


334 



Spring 
Nur. 331 



Nur. 333 



4.25 



(Nursing Care of the 
Developing 

Family I) 1.5 

(Nursing Care of the 

Adult I) 1.5 

(Basic Concepts of 
Pharmacology and 
Therapeutics) _1 



(Nursing Care of the 
Developing 

Family II) 1.5 

(Nursing Care of the 
Adult II) 1.5 



May Term 

Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the 

Social System) 1 

SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 335 (Nursing 

Research) 1 

Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the 

Emotionally 

Troubled 

Individual & 

Family) 1.5 

Nursing Elective*** 1 

Guided Elective**** 5 

4 

Spring 

Nur. 441 (Comprehensive 

Nursing Care) 1.5 

Nur. 442 (Professional 

Issues) 5 

Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in 

Biology and 

Medicine) I 

Elective 1 

4 

*Prerequisite to Sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
CPTR 108, 125 or Math 214. 
***Student must select one course from 
NUR 420, 422. 443, or N80-89. 
****Student must select one course from 
Soc. 1 10, 1 14, 220. 222, 224, 227, 228, 
229, 331. 334. or 335. Other courses 
may be approved on an individual basis. 
Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits). 

The student may take additional units for 
electives. independent study and/or 
honors. 

220 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION 
IN FAMILY HEALTH 
Essentials of normal nutrition and their rela- 
tionship to the health of individuals and fami- 
lies. These concepts serve as a basis for the 
development of an understanding of ther- 
apeutic application of dietary principles and 
the health professional's role and responsi- 
bility in this facet of client care. Three hours 
of lecture. '/> unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry 
108, 115. or consent of instructor. Open to 
non-nursing majors. 



53 



221 FOUNDATIONS OF 

PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE 
Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and common 
health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, fami- 
ly, and environment. In this first chnical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a max- 
imum level of functioning. Three hours of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory, 
/'/j units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108. 
115. Nursing 220. and Biology 1/3. Open to 
nursing majors only. 

300 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS 
OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING 
Theoretical concepts underlying profession- 
al practice. Additional focus on health and 
common health problems, recognition of 
multi-directional influence of the individual, 
family, and environment. Two hour seminar. 
'/: unit. Prerequisites: Successful completion 
of Nursing 221 challenge e.uimination. 
Chem 108. 115: Psvch 110. 117: Bio 113. 
OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 

310 PROCESSES ESSENTIAL 
TO NURSING PRACTICE 
Clinical focus on the incorporation of nurs- 
ing, group, interpersonal, and change pro- 
cesses: therapeutic communication, family, 
health promotion and community concepts, 
physical assessment, collaboration, and 
teaching/learning principles in the commun- 
ity setting, '/j unit. Prerequisites: Successful 
completion of Nursing 330 and Nursing 332 
challenge exams. Bio 114. and Bio 226. 
OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 



330-331 



NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 



Examination of health and nursing needs of 
beginning and developing families. Initial 
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and 
infants within the family unit as well as the 
common health problems of children through 
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on nurs- 
ing needs of children and mothers with health 
problems of actue and long term nature, the 
influence of illness on their development and 
the effect of illness on the family configura- 
tion. Three hours of lecture and 7'/: hours 
clinical laboratory. /'/? units. Prerequisite 
for Nursing 330: Nursing 221 . Biology 1 14. 
226. Prerequisite for Nursing 331 : Nursing 
330 and 334. 

332-333 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 
Identification of adult health care needs and 
implementation of nursing activities based 
on an understanding of growth and develop- 
ment, pathophysiology, communication 
skills, interpersonal dynamics, and 
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of 



lecture and Th hours clinical laboratory. 
1'/: units. Prerequisite for Nursing 332: 
Nursing 221. Biology 114 and 226. Core- 
quisite: Nursing 334. Prerequisite for Nurs- 
ing 333: Nursing 332 and 334. 

334 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and ther- 
apeutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and 
physiological processes. Interactions and 
toxicological aspects of drug therapy are re- 
viewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit. Core- 
quisite: Nursing 330. 332. or consent of in- 
structor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

336 THE NURSE IN 

THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories of 
social systems. Examination of induction 
into the hospital system. Evaluation of stan- 
dards of care. Focus on utilization of change 
theory. Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours 
of clinical laboratory. 1 unit. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 331. 333. 334. Required for the 
nursing major and offered only in May term. 

420 HEALTH ASSESSMENT 

Identification and examination of methods 
for collecting and categorizing accurate data 
necessary for professional care. Emphasis is 
placed on the individual throughout the life 
span with identification of clinical and be- 
havioral findings appropriate to each age 
group. Two hours of lecture for '/: unit. Two 
hours of lecture and a 5 hour clinical labora- 
tory for I unit. Prerequisites: Senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. 

422 HEALTH EDUCATION 

Examination of learning theories appropriate 
to all age groups. Discussion of the concepts 
and techniques necessary for assessment, 
planning, implementation and evaluation of 
the leaching/learning process. Emphasis will 
be placed on self-care. Two-hour lecture for 
'/: unit. Two-hour lecture and a 5 hour clinic- 
al laboratory for I unit. School Nurse candi- 
dates should lake the one-unit course. Prere- 
quisites: Senior standing or consent of in- 
structor. 

430 COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING 

Overview of the role of the community 
health nurse in a variety of settings, e.g.. 
industries, state health clinics. MHMR. 
school systems. Discussion of wellness 
promotion, availability of communiy re- 
sourcs. environmental health, prevention 
and treatment of communicable diseases, 
and group process with emphasis on com- 



munication skills. Two hour lecture for 'A 
unit Two hour lecture and a 5 hour clinical 
laboratory for 1 unit. School Nurse candi- 
dates must take the equivalent of one unit 
course. Prerequisites: Senior standing or 
consent of the instructor. 

431 SCHOOL NURSE PRACTICUM 

Essentials of school health, school nursing 
and health promotion. These concepts serve 
as a basis for the development of an under- 
standing of the role of the school nurse. This 
course provides the student with the oppor- 
tunity to function in the role of the school 
nurse. It is a course built on the culmination 
of knowledge obtained in previous nursing 
courses and nursing experiences. 210 hours 
clinical and seminar. 1 '/: unit. Prerequisites: 
OPEN TO SCHOOL NURSE CANDIDATES 
who have met all other requirements for cer- 
tification and have obtained departmental 
approval. 

435 RESEARCH IN NURSING 

Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing re- 
search. Development of a research proposal 
focusing on a nursing problem. Four hours 
of lecture. 1 unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
103. Computer Science 108, and Nursing 
330 and 332 or consent of instructor. Open 
to non-nursing majors. 

440 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human rela- 
tionships with focus on intrapsychic, inter- 
personal, and physiologic etiology. Emph- 
asis on advanced therapeutic nurse-patient 
relationships within context of family, com- 
munity, and health care systems. Three 
hours of lecture and 7'/: hours clinical 
laboratory. 1'/: units. Prerequisites: Nurs- 
ing 331. 333. 336. 

441 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursing course with focus on 
leadership and management skills in a choice 
of clinical settings. Seminars provide oppor- 
tunities for students to share commonalities 
and unique aspects of professional practice. 
Three hours of lecture and 7'/2 hours of cli- 
nical laboratory. I'/z units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 336. 440. 

442 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context 
of the historical background of the profes- 
sion, the social forces which influence nurs- 
ing, and nursing's impact upon society. 7"ii'o- 
hour seminar. '/.? unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 



54 



443 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed to 
permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. '/: iinil. Prere- 
quisite: Senior standing or consent of in- 
structor. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
IN NURSING 
An opportunity to develop and implement an 
individual plan of study under faculty gui- 
dance. '/:unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing 
or consent of chairperson. 



PHILOSOPHY 

Associate Professor: Griffith. 

Whelan 
Assistant Professor; Herring 

(Chairperson) 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around which 
we organize our thought in science, 
religion, education, morality, the arts. 
and other human enterprises. A major in 
philosophy, together with appropriate 
other courses, can provide an excellent 
preparation for policy-making positions 
of many kinds, for graduate study in 
several fields, and for careers in educa- 
tion, law. and the ministry. The major 
in philosophy consists of eight courses 
numbered 1 10 or above, including 438, 
439. 449 and at least three other courses 
numbered 225 or above. 

A minor in Philosophy consists of any 
four philosophy courses numbered 220 
or above; or any five philosophy courses 
number 1 10 or above, three of which 
must be numbered 300 or above. Three 
more specialized minors are also avail- 
able: a minor in Philosophy and Law 
consists of four courses from Philosophy 
224, 225, 334. 335, 449 or Independent 
Studies or five courses including any 
three courses from the preceding list and 
any two courses from Philosophy 115, 
216, 218, 219; a minor in Philosophy 
and Science consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 223, 225, 331. 333. 449 or 
Independent Studies; a minor in the His- 
tory of Philosophy consists of four 



courses from Philosophy 223, 224, 438. 
439, 449 or Independent Studies. Since 
topics in Philosophy 449 and indepen- 
dent studies projects vary, these courses 
may be used to count toward a special- 
ized minor only if they are approved in 
advance by the department. 

105 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, with 
primary emphasis on delecting fallacies, 
evaluating inductive reasoning, and under- 
standing the rudiments of scientific method. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination of 
several examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the 
relation of the mind to the body, the possi- 
bility of human freedom, arguments about 
the existence of God. the conditions of 
knowledge, and the relation of language to 
thought. Some attention is also given to the 
principles of acceptable reasoning. 

114 PHILOSOPHY AND 
PERSONAL CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a number of contemporary moral issues 
which call for personal decision. Topics 
often investigated include: the "good" life, 
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abortion, 
suicide and death, violence and pacifism, 
obedience to the law, the relevance of per- 
sonal beliefs to morality. Discussion centers 
on some of the suggestions philosophers 
have made about how to make such deci- 
sions 

115 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 
An introductory philosophical examination 
of the moral and conceptual dimension of 
various contemporary public issues, such as 
the relation of ethics to politics and the law. 
the enforcement of morals, the problems of 
fair distribution of goods and opportunities. 
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natur- 
al resources, and the application of ethics to 
business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues. 

216 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the American business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 



217 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts 
involved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 
the issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible? What do we need to learn? 
Alternate years. 

218 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which are 
of special importance in legal contexts. Dis- 
cussion includes both general topics, such 
as the justification of punishment, and more 
specific topics, such as the insanity defense 
and the rights of the accused. Readings are 
arranged topically and include both classical 
and contemporary sources. 

219 ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of the 
ethical issues which arise as a result of con- 
temporary medical and biological technolo- 
gy. Typical of these issues are euthanasia, 
behavior control, patient rights, experimen- 
tation on humans, fetal research, abortion, 
genetic engineering, population control, and 
distribution of health resources. 

223 HISTORY OF SCIENCE 
AND METAPHYSICS 

An historical survey of the attempt to under- 
stand the physical universe Particular atten- 
tion is paid to common origins of philosophy 
and science in the works of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, to the question of how scien- 
tific and philosophical thinking differs from 
mythological and technological thinking, to 
the rationalism empiricism dispute in science 
and metaphysics, and to the interaction be- 
tween philosophy and science in the formu- 
lating fundamental questions about the 
physical universe and in developing and cn- 
ticizing concepts designed to answer them, 

224 HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

An historical survey of the most important 
social and political philsophers from So- 
crates to Marx. Special attention is paid to 
the relationship between ethics and politics 
as seen by Plato and Anstotle and to the 
social contract theories of Hobbes, Locke, 
and Rousseau. 



225 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modem symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. In- 
cluded are truth-functional relations, the 



55 



logic of propositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to va- 
rious topics in the philosophy of logic. 

331 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a vanety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typical- 
ly considered are these: Is there such a thing 
as human nature? Are human beings diffe- 
rent, in any fundamental way, from other 
animals? Are human beings free? Is human 
consciousness just a brain process? Are hu- 
man beings inherently predisposed to evil? 
Are human beings biologically determined to 
be selfish or aggressive? Are the differences 
in achievement between men and women 
biologically based? Prerequisite: Students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor' s permission. 

332 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. In- 
cluded are such topics as the nature of reli- 
gious discourse, arguments for and against 
the existence of God, and the relation be- 
tween religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary sources. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

333 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 
A consideration of philosophically important 
conceptual problems arising from reflection 
about natural science, including such topics 
as the nature of scientific laws and theories, 
the character of explanation, the import of 
prediction, the existence of "non- 
observable" theoretical entities such as elec- 
trons and genes, the problem of justifying 
induction, and various puzzles associated 
with probability. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

334 CONTEMPORARY 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics stu- 
died include the purpose of government, the 
nature of legitimate authority, the foundation 
of human rights, and the limits of human 
freedom. Emphasis is placed on the logic of 
social and political thought and on the analy- 
sis of basic principles and concepts. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

335 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions . Central to the course is critic- 



al consideration of the proposals and the 
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theonsts. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
students without previous study in philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

438 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two 
courses in philosophy or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

439 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, LeibnizI, 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

449 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include artifical intelligence, the ethics of 
research of human subjects, life after death, 
personal identity, and human nghts. This 
seminar is designed to provide junior and 
senior philosophy majors and other qualified 
students with more than the usual opportun- 
ity for concentrated and cooperative inquiry. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. This 
seminar may be repeated for credit. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent independent studies in philosophy in- 
clude Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia, 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructor: Holmes (Chairperson) 

101 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, know- 
ledge, and appreciation of sports that include 
swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball, 
archery, field hockey, soccer, golf, badmin- 



ton, modern dance, skiing, elementary 
games (for elementary teachers), toneastics, 
physical fitness, and other activities. Back- 
packing, cross-country and alpine skiing, 
jogging, and cycling are offered on a contract 
basis. Beginning swimming is required for 
all non-swimmers. Students may select any 
activity offered. A reasonable degree of pro- 
ficiency is required in the activities. Emph- 
asis is on the potential use of activities as 
recreational and leisure-time interests. Two 
semesters of physical education (two hours 
per week) are required. All physical educa- 
tion classes are open to men and women. 

Athletic Training 

Lycoming College established an 
apprenticeship program in athletic train- 
ing in 1979 after recognizing two condi- 
tions: the importance of the care and pre- 
vention of athletic injuries by trained 
professionals, and the career's promising 
growth potential. 

To complete this non-credit program 
students participate in practical as well as 
classroom work under the supervision of 
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer. 
Students become eligible to participate in 
the National Athletic Trainers Associa- 
tion (N.A.T.A.) Certification examina- 
tion to earn the status of an N.A.T.A. 
certified trainer. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio 
Associate Professor: Roskin 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Wolf 

The major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, national, 
state, and local levels. Majors are en- 
couraged to develop their faculties to 
make independent, objective analyses 
which can be applied to the broad spec- 
trum of the social sciences. 

Although the political science major is 
not designed as a vocational major, stu- 
dents with such training may go directly 
into government service, journalism, 
teaching, or private administrative agen- 
cies. A political science major can pro- 
vide the base for the study of law, or for 
graduate studies leading to administra- 
tive work in federal, state, or local gov- 



56 



emments, international organizations, or 
college teaching. Students seeking certi- 
fication to teach secondary school social 
studies may major in political science but 
should consult their advisors and the 
education department. 

A major consists of eight political sci- 
ence courses, including Political Science 
1 16. Prospective majors are encouraged 
to register for this course during their 
freshman year. An exemption will be 
granted only if it strengthens the stu- 
dent's program. In addition to 1 16, stu- 
dents must take at least one course in 
each of five areas (A to E). Students are 
encouraged, also, to select a minor in 
another department in accordance with 
their academic and career interests and in 
consultation with their departmental 
advisor. 

For non-majors, the department offers 
three minors: a minor in Political Science 
consists of any four courses numbered 
200 or above from areas A to E; a minor 
in Foreign Affairs consists of four 
courses selected from Political Science 
220, 225, 326, 327, 438 and 439: and a 
minor in Legal Studies consists of Poli- 
tical Science 33 1 , 335, 436 and one other 
course numbered 200 or above. Students 
are encouraged to consult with depart- 
ment members on the selection of a 
minor. 

1 16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 

An introductory course in political science that asks 
how and why people form political communities, 
what holds them together, and how political sys- 
tems may either improve or damage themselves. 
Includes comparison of the U.S. with other coun- 
tries and discussion of current political and public- 
policy issues. 

A. American Politics 

1 10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 
An introduction to American national gov- 
ernment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making pro- 
cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu- 
tive, and judicial branches of government, 
attention will be given to political parties and 
interest groups, elections and voting be- 
havior, and constitutional rights. Recom- 
mended to all social science-education ma- 
jors.and to those students who have had in- 
adequate or insufficient preparation in Amer- 
ican government. 



1 1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 
the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of govern- 
ment. 

223 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the presi- 
dent with analysis of his major roles as chief 
administrator, legislator, political leader, 
foreign policy maker, and commander-in- 
chief. Special attention is given to those pres- 
idents who led the nation boldly. Subject to 
student demand, but offered at least once 
during a four-year cycle. 

B. Legal Studies 

331 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as Amer- 
icans? What should they be? A frank discus- 
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment nghts. 
the rights of criminal suspects and defen- 
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal 
protection of the laws. Students will read and 
brief the more important Supreme Court de- 
cisions. Prerequisite: junior or senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. 

335 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, func- 
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of 
political and social control. Included for dis- 
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the 
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, 
and minority groups. Prerequisite: junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

436 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Com- 
munication 331. Prerequisite: junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

333 BUREAUCRACY AND 

PUBLIC ADMINISl RATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the poli- 
tical impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov- 
ernment? These questions, among others, 
will be considered in this examination of 
public bureaucracies. This course is highly 
recommended to students planning to take an 
internship in city or county government 
through the political science department. 
Subject to student demand, but offered at 
least once during a four-year cycle. 



347 WOMEN AND POLITICS 

The historical, philosophical, and practical 
context and conduct of women in a variety of 
political roles. This course considers both 
elective and nonelective activities, and in- 
cludes analyses of women's issues currently 
on legislative and court agendas. Alternate 
years. 

434 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and re- 
writing of public affairs at the local, national, 
and international levels. There will be neith- 
er texts nor examinations, but short written 
assignments will be due every class meeting. 
Prerequisite: Mass Comm 329 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

448 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 
exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the man- 
ipulation of public opinion through the uses 
of propaganda, and the American response to 
politics and political issues. 

D. Comparative Politics 

220 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of Europe 
with emphasis on comparison and patterns of 
government. The course will review politics 
in Britain, France. West Germany, the 
Soviet Union, and other countries and 
attempt to find underlying similarities and 
differences. 

326 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact w ith each other and with gov- 
ernment, what they expect from the system, 
how they acquire their political attitudes and 
styles, and how these contribute to the type 
of government. Alternate years. 

438 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 

The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

225 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to intema- 
tional relations with emphasis on the 
varieties of conflicts which may grow into 
war. 

327 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 

The study of several current areas of interna- 
tional tension and conflict, including rela- 
tions among the United States. Soviet Union. 



57 



and China, plus the Middle East and whatev- 
er new danger spots arise over time. Aller- 
nate years. 

439 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological perspec- 
tives, plus an examination of the domestic 
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years. 

F. Special Programs 

470-479 INTERNSHIPS (See index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning 
situations with a wide variety of public and 
private agencies and organizations Students 
have served as interns with the Public Defen- 
der's Office, the Lycoming County Court 
Adminstrator. and the Williamsport City 
government. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 



Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professor: Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Balleweg, 

Ryan 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It is 
designed to meet the needs of students 
seeking careers in psychology or other 
natural or social sciences. It also meets 
the needs of students seeking a better 
understanding of human behavior as a 
means of furthering individual and career 
goals in other areas. Psychology majors 
and others are urged to discuss course 
selections in psychology with members 
of the department to help insure 
appropriate course selection. 

A major consists of Psychology 1 10, 
336, 43 1 , 432 and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 
Psychology 1 10 and four other psycholo- 



gy courses (three of which must be num- 
bered 200 or above) which must be 
approved by the department. 

110 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cogni- 
tion, and developmental. 

112 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small- 
group dynamics and interpersonal com- 
munication. Topics covered will include 
communication processes, interpretation of 
motivation, conceptualization of individual 
personalities, problem solving and lead- 
ership. The first stage of the course will focus 
on research and theory; the second half will 
emphasize the development of skills and 
techniques where students become members 
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and 
making a case study of the processes in- 
volved. May term only. 

116 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
critically examained. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 110. 

117 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of human 
growth and development throughout the life 
span. Prerequisite: Ps\cholo)>\ 110. 

1 1 8 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues rai,sed by as well 
as about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self- 
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 1 10. 

224 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The scientific exploration of interpersonal 
communication and behavior. Topics in- 
clude attitudes and attitude change, attrac- 
tion and communication, social perception 
and social influence, prosocial and antisocial 
behavior and group processes. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 1 10. 

225 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The application of the principles and 
methods of psychology to selected industrial 
and organizational situations. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 



239 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied analy- 
sis of behavior. Focus will be on the applica- 
tion of experimental method to the individual 
clinical case. The course will cover target- 
ing, behavior, base-rating, intervention 
strategies, and outcome evaluation. Learn- 
ing-based modification techniques such as 
contingency management, counter- 
conditioning, extinction, discrimination 
training, aversive conditioning, and negative 
practice will be examined. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 1 10 or consent of instructor . 

333 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psycho- 
logist's method of approach to the under- 
standing of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and orga- 
nization of the nervous system to the phe- 
nomena of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

334 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, including 
scale transformation, norms, standardiza- 
tion, validation procedures, and estimation 
of reliability. Prerequisites: Psychology 110 
and statistics. 

335 HISTORY AND 
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses 
in psychology. 

336 PERSONALITY THEORY 

A review of the major theories of personality 
development and personality functioning. In 
addition to covering the details of each 
theory, the implications and applications of 
each theory will be considered. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

337 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions directed and 
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec- 
ognition, attention, conceptualization, prob- 
lem-solving, fantasy, language, dreaming, 
and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology 
110. 

338 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of the 
teaching-learning process. Areas considered 
may include educational objectives, pupil 
and teacher characteristics, concept learn- 
ing, problem solving and creativity, attitudes 
and values, motivation, retention and trans- 
fer, evaluation and measurement. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 110 or consent of in- 
structor. 



58 



341 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and re- 
search on the psychology of gender differ- 
ences. The major theories and basic research 
on gender differences will be covered. Spe- 
cial topics include sex differences in achieve- 
ment, power, and communication; sex-role 
stereotypes; beliefs about masculinity and 
femininity; and gender influences on mental 
health. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

431 LEARNING 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning processes. The examination of the 
basic methods and principles of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
1 10 and statistics. 

432 SENSORY 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical metho- 
dology and basic neurophysiological 
methods as they are applied to the under- 
standing of sensor processes. Prerequisites: 
Psychology 1 10 and statistics. 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus experience in a community 
setting offering psychological services, sup- 
plemented with classroom instruction and 
discussion. Psychology 448 covers the basic 
counseling skills, while Psychology 449 
covers the major theoretical approaches to 
counseling Prerequisite: consent of in- 
structor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post- 
baccalaureale objectives in particular. Stu- 
dents have, for example, worked in prisons, 
public and private school, county govern- 
ment, and for the American Red Cross. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent study is an opportunity for stu- 
dents to pursue special interests in areas for 
which courses are not offered. In addition, 
students have an opportunity to study a topic 
in more depth than is possible in the regular 
classroom situation. Studies in the past have 
included child abuse, counseling of hospital 
patients, and research in the psychology of 
natural disasters. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Honors in psychology requires original con- 
tributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the relationship 
between socio-economic status and visual 
versus auditory learning. 



RELIGION 



Professor: Guerra (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Hughes 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding Religion 113, 114, and 120. At 
least seven courses must be taken in the 
department. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 221 and 222. Heb- 
rew 221 and 222, History 340 and 416, 
Philosophy 332, and Sociology 333. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 1 10. 1 13, 1 14 and 
four religion courses numbered 200 or 
above . 

An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical 
Languages requires the completion of 
Greek 221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 
222. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be reli- 
gious. Some of the issues are the definition of 
religion, the meaning of symbolism, con- 
cepts of God. ecstatic phenomena. Specific 
attention will be devoted to the current prob- 
lem of cults and religious liberty. 

113 OLD TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting and in the light of 
archaeological findings to show the faith and 
religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish com- 
munity in the Biblical period, and an intro- 
duction to the history of interpretation with 
an emphasis on contemporary Old Testament 
criticism and theology. 

114 NEW TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting to show the faith and 
religious life of the Christian community in 
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the 
history of interpretation with an emphasis on 
contemporary New Testament criticism and 
theology. 

117 INTRODUCTION TO 

SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA 
An examination of claims for supernatural or 
paranormal phenomena with an emphasis on 
critical methodology and the evaluation of 
evidence. The course is designed to teach 
students the difference between the scientific 
and religious methodologies, the proper role 



of each, and the hazards of mixing the two. 
Subjects covered include ESP, Spiritualism, 
the Bermuda Triangle, witchcraft, faith heal- 
ing, Noah's Ark. ghosts, monsters, and 
others. Offered May and summer terms only. 

120 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princip- 
al issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the reli- 
gious doctrines of death and immortality. 
Course includes, as optional, practical pro- 
jects with terminal patients under profession- 
al supervision. Only one course from the 
combination 120-121 may he used for dis- 
tribution. 

121 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical stu- 
dies, the New Testament resurrection narra- 
tives, the Asian doctrine of reincarnation, 
and the classical theological beliefs of provi- 
dence and predestination. Religion 120 is 
recommended hut not required. Only one 
course from the combination 120-121 may he 
used for distribution. 

222 PROTESTANTISM IN 
THE MODERN WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present against the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from 
the 17th century scientific revolution to 
Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psycholo- 
gy. Special attention will be paid to the con- 
stant interaction between Protestantism and 
the world in which it finds itself. 

223 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and reli- 
gious background of the formation of Christ- 
ianity and the antecedents of Christian belief 
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in 
Hellenism. 

224 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and ex- 
pansion of Judaism and Islam with special 
attention given to the theological contents of 
the literatures of these religions as far as they 
are normative in matters of faith, practice, 
and organization. Also, a review of their 
contributions to the spiritual heritage of man- 
kind. 

225 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism. Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East-West dialogue. 



59 



226 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the world in which the Biblical 
literature originated with special attention 
given to archaeological results that throw 
light on the clarification of the Biblical text. 
Also, an introduction to basic archaeological 
method and a study in depth of several repre- 
sentative excavations along with the artifacts 
and material culture recovered from different 
historical periods. 

228 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF 
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Mesopo- 
tamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and Egypt 
from the rise of the Sumerian culture to Alex- 
ander the Great. Careful attention will be 
given to the religious views prevalent in the 
ancient Near East as far as these views in- 
teracted with the culture and faith of Biblical 



230 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psychology 
in relation to the phenomena of religion and 
religious behavior. The course concentrates 
on religious experience or manifestations 
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will 
be sought to questions such as: What does it 
feel like to be religious or to have a religious 
experience? What is the religious function in 
human development? How does one think 
psychologically about theological problems? 

331 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of 
law and religion, decision making In the field 
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc- 
tion of society in a planetary civilization. 

332 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern; current topics include the theologic- 
al significance of law, the ethics of love, and 
the Holocaust. The course may be repeated 
for credit if the topic is different from one 
previously studied. 

337 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related 
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics in- 
clude prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead 
Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus. Pauline 
theology. Judaism and Christian origins, 
reaction criticism — the way the Synoptic 
Gospels and John give final form to their 
message. Course will vary from year to year 
and mav he taken for credit a second time if 
the topic is different from one previously 
studied. 



341 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 

A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in Western culture. The content of this 
course will vary from year to year. Subjects 
studied in recent years include the theologic- 
al significance of Freud. Marx, and Nietz- 
sche; Christianity and existentialism; theolo- 
gy and depth psychology; the religious 
dimension of contemporary literature. 

342 THE NATURE AND MISSION 
OF THE CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as "The 
People of God" with reference to the Biblic- 
al, Protestant. Orthodox, and Roman Catho- 
lic traditions. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local chur- 
ches under the supervision of the pastor and a 
member of the faculty. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages. New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A recent project was on the theology of hope 
with reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch 
and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor; Wilk 
Associate Professor: Jo 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Lawrence, 

Strauser 

The Sociology/Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both 
tracks introduce the students to the fun- 
damental concepts of the discipline, and 
both tracks prepare the student for 
graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology re- 
quires the core course sequence 110, 
1 14, 229, 444, and 447 and three other 
courses within the department with the 



exception of 115, 222, 223, 225. 440. 
and 443. Religion 226 may also be 
counted toward the major. 

Track II — Human Services in a Socio- 
Ciiltural Perspective requires: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 110, 222, 229, 443, 
444, and 447. In addition, students must 
select two courses from among the fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 220, 
221, 227, 228, 300, 334, and 335. Stu- 
dents are also required to choose two 
units from the following courses: 
Psychology 110, Psychology 224, Eco- 
nomics 224, and Political Science 333. 
Recommended courses: Accounting 
110, Accounting 226, Spanish 111, 
Spanish 112, History 126, and Philoso- 
phy 334. 

Majors in both tracks are encouraged 
to participate in the internship program. 

A minor in Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy consists of Sociology-Anthropology 
110 and four other sociology- 
anthropology courses (three of which 
must be numbered 220 or above) which 
must be approved by the department. 
Sociology- Anthropology courses 115, 
223, 225, 339, and 440 cannot be 
counted toward this minor. 

110 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

1 14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthropo- 
logy; its subject matter, methodology, and 
goals. Examination of biological and cultural 
evolution, the fossil evidence for human 
evolution, and questions raised in relation to 
human evolution Other topics include race, 
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis- 
toric cultural development. 

1 1 5 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the adminis- 
tration of justice; the historical development 
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdic- 
tion and procedures of courts; an introduc- 
tion to the studies, literature, and research in 
criminal justice; careers in criminal justice. 

220 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The hislorv, structure, and functions of mod- 



60 



em American family life, emphasizing dat- 
ing, courtship, factors in marital adjustment, 
and the changing status of family members. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anlhropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

221 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study of 
the constellation of factors that relate to juve- 
nile delinquency causation, handling the 
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice 
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and 
community responsibility. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

222 INTRODUCTION TO 
HUMAN SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interested 
in learning about, or entering, the human 
services profession. It will review the his- 
tory, the range, and the goals of human ser- 
vices together with a survey of various 
strategies and approaches to human prob- 
lems. It will include practical discussions of 
social behavioral differences as they relate to 
stress and conflict in people's lives. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 andlor 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

223 INTRODUCTION TO 
LAW ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law 
of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 
or consent of instructor. 

224 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic 
institutions and problems of modem city life. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

225 INTRODUCTION TO 
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced crimin- 
al justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an 
in-depth study of detection and investigation 
of major crimes. Particular attention is 
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal pa- 
rameters of evidence and interrogation, and 
prosecutory procedures. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of 
instructor. Will not be counted toward the 
sociologyi anthropology major. 

226 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, stmcture. and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anlhropology 110 or con- 
sent of instructor. 



227 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, characteris- 
tics, and consequences of social problems in 
America from diverse socio-cultural pers- 
pectives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban crises, family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, dmg abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

228 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 
health, housing, socio-economic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social par- 
ticipation. Sociological, social psychologic- 
al, and anthropological frames of reference 
utilized in analysis and description of aging 
and its relationship to society, culture, and 
personality. 

229 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social anthro- 
pology designed to familiarize the student 
with the analytical approaches to the diverse 
cultures of the world. The relevancy of cultu- 
ral anthropology for an understanding of the 
human condition will be stressed. Topics to 
be covered include the nature of primitive 
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con- 
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the 
individual and culture, the social patteming 
of behavior and social control, an anthropo- 
logical perspective on the culture of the Un- 
ited States. 

300 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions 
under which criminal laws develop; etiology 
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of cri- 
minal behavior in terms of time, space, and 
social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

331 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which 
affect their development. Role-analysis 
theory will be applied to the past, present, 
and future experience of women as it relates 
to the role options of society as a whole. 
Students will do an original research project 
on the role of women. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 1 10. Alternate years. 

332 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all societies, 
and the interrelationships between the social 
institutions within a society. The course is 
divided into two basic parts: I . That aspect 



which deals with the systematic organization 
of society in general, and 2. The concentra- 
tion on a particular social institution: econo- 
mic, political, educational, or social welfare. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

333 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a sur- 
vey of sociological studies of religious be- 
havior . Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

334 RACIAL AND 
CULTURAL MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national groups 
within the framework of American cultural 
values. An analysis will include historical, 
cultural, and social factors underlying ethnic 
and racial conflict. Field trips and individual 
reports are part of the requirements for the 
course. Prerequisite: Sociology - 
Anthropology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

335 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 
Introduction to psychological anthropology, 
its theories and methodologies. Emphasis 
will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations 
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 229 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Offered at least once every three years. 

336 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student wiih 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by 
primitive peoples. The functions of primitive 
religion in regard to the individual, society, 
and various cultural institutions will be ex- 
amined. Subjects to be surveyed include 
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spint pos- 
session, the cultural use of dreams, and re- 
vitalization movements. Particular emphasis 
will be given to shamanism, transcultural 
religious experience, and the creation of 
cultural realities through religions. Both a 
social scientific and existentialist perspective 
will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

337 THE ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians. Pueblos, 
KwakiutI, and Netsilik. Changes m native 
lifeways due to European contacts and Un- 
ited Slates expansion will be considered. Re- 
cent cultural developments among American 



61 



Indians will be placed in an anthropological 
perspective. Offered al least once every three 
years. 

338 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the stu- 
dent with the techniques of conflict resolu- 
tion and the utilization of public power in 
primitive society as well as the various 
theories of primitive law and government. 
The rise of the state and an anthropological 
perspective on modem law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self- 
regulation and social control, legitimacy, 
coercion, and exploitation will be the orga- 
nizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 

339 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, evolution 
of the pnson and prison methods with emph- 
asis on prison community, prison 
architecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment 
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails, 
reformatories, prison organization and admi- 
nistration, custody, and discipline. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115. 

440 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced criminal 
justice major. While the course concerns the 
study of probation and parole as parts of the 
criminal justice system and their impact on 
the system as a whole, the primary emphasis 
is the impact on the offender Particular 
attention is given to diagnostic report writing 
on offenders, pre-sentence investigation, 
offender classification, and parole planning. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 
and 3S9. Alternate years. 

441 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. Par- 
ticular attention will be given to factors 
which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impact of inequality on the 
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

443 HUMAN SERVICES 

IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS 
The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, pnsons. therapeutic 
communities, mental hospitals, and other 
human service institutions. The methodolo- 
gy of fieldwork will be explored so as to 
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural 



dimensions of helping environments and re- 
lationships. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

444 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociolo- 
gical thought from its eariiest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions and 
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologic- 
al thought since the time of Comte. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

445 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthropo- 
logical thought from the 18th century to the 
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo- 
logical thought since 1850. Topics include 
evolutionism, historical -particularism, 
cultural idealism, cultural materialism, func- 
tionalism, structuralism, and ethnoscience. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 229 
or consent of instructor. Offered at least 
once every three years. 

446 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF 
THE AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tricultura! 
communities of Northern New Mexico. 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Arizo- 
na, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni. Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez. Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos. Rio Amba. Sante Fe. and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology 1 10 or consent of instruc- 
tor. May or summer only. 

447 RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro- 
cess of designing and administering research 
and the application of research Different 
methodological skills are considered, includ- 
ing field work, questionnaire construction, 
and other methods of data gathenng and the 
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 and Mathematical I OS or 
consent of instructor 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical ap- 
plications in a community agency. Specifics 
of the course to be worked out in conjunction 
with department, student, and agency. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or 
cotisent of instructor. 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agencies 
under the supervision of administrators. 
However, other internship experiences, such 
as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob- 
ation and parole departments, under the su- 
pervision of administrative personnel. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings and 
tutorials, the student will have the opportun- 
ity to pursue these interests and topics in 
greater depth than is usually possible in a 
regular course. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



THEATRE 



Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Allen 
Assistant Technical Director: Huffman 
Part-Time Instructor: Clark 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course re- 
quirements, majors are expected to par- 
ticipate actively in Arena Theatre pro- 
ductions. Majors are urged to include 
courses in art. music, psychology, and 
English, or other areas of special in- 
terest. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre 
History and Literature consists of Thea- 
tre 100, 332, 333, 335, and 400. The 
following courses are required to com- 
plete a minor in Performance: Theatre 
100, 140, 226, 334, 336, and either 332 
or 333. To obtain a minor in Technical 
Theatre, a student must complete 
Theatre 100, 148. 228, 338, and 420 or 
430. 

The fine arts distribution requirement 
may be satisfied by selecting any two of 
the following recommended courses: 



62 



Theatre 100. 1 10, 140, 148, 332. 333 or 
other courses with the consent of the in- 
structor. 

100 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 

Designed as a comprehensive introduction to 
the aesthetics of theatre. From the spectator's 
point of view, the nature of theatre will be 
explored, including dramatic literature and 
the integral functioning of acting, directing, 
and all production aspects. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film tech- 
nique through lectures and by viewing regu- 
lar weekly films chosen from classic, con- 
temporary, and experimental short films. 

140 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepara- 
tion with emphasis on developing the actor's 
creative imagination through improvisations 
and scene study. 

148 INTRODUCTION TO 
PLAY PRODUCTION 
Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and labora- 
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the 
student will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery. 

226 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of the 
director in preparation, rehearsal, and per- 
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing 
the student's ability to analyze scnpts, and 
on the development of the student's imagina- 
tion. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

228 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE 
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT 
An introduction to the theatre with an emph- 
asis on stagecraft. Productions each semester 
serve as the laboratory to provide the practic- 
al experience necessary to understand the 
material presented in the classroom. Prere- 
quisite: Theatre 148 or consent of instructor . 

231 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 
OF PLAY PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 
production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

232 FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKEUP 
Essentials of stage makeup: straight, charac- 
ter, special types. Effects of lighten makeup 
are included. Prerequisite: Theatre 148. 
One-half unit. Alternate years. 



233 ADVANCED MAKEUP 

Advanced techniques in makeup design. 
Three dimensional and prosthetic makeups 
are included, with emphasis on nonrealistic 
and nonhuman forms. Prerequisite: Theatre 
232. One-half unit. Alternate years. 

332 HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of 
theatre from the Greeks to the Restoration. 
Alternate years. 

333 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

334 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 
Instruction and practice m character analysis 
and projection with emphasis on vocal and 
body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

335 THEORIES OF THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philo- 
sophical roots of the modem theatre from the 
birth of realism to the present and the influ- 
ences on modem theatre practice. Selected 
readings from Nietzsche, Marx, Jung, 
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard. Sartre, 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, 
Shaw, Meyerhold, Anaud, Brecht, Brook. 
Grotowski. Alternate years. 

336 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 
Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to 
function in preparation and rehearsal. Prac- 
tical experience involves the directing of two 
one-act plays from the contemporary theatre. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 226. 

337 PLAYWRITING AND 
DRAMATIC CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
writing with an emphasis on creative writing, 
culminating in a written one-act play, plus an 
historical survey of dramatic criticism from 
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon 
developing the student's ability to write re- 
views and criticism of theatrical productions 
and films. Alternate years. 

338 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to the 
theatre . Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent 
of instructor. 

400 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis of 
interest of students and faculty. At times. 



more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted to- 
ward English major with consent of English 
Department. 

420 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
COSTUME DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
constmction of costumes for the theatre. Stu- 
dents will participate in the design of a pro- 
duction. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

430 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES DESIGN 
The theory of properties design for the stage , 
including the production of specific prop- 
erties for staging use. Elements of design, 
fabrication, and the constmction of prop- 
erties employing a variety of materials and 
the application of new theatrical technology. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of in- 
structor. 

440 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 

Preparation of monologues and two- 
character scenes, contemporary and classic- 
al. The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 334. 

446 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play from 
the script to the stage for public performance . 
Prerequisite: Theatre 336. 

448 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and practic- 
al design. The student will design one full 
production as his major project. Prere- 
quisites: Theatre 228 or 338 and consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres 
such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapolis, 
and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an Are- 
na production. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 

A typical study could be the writing and 

production of an original play. 



63 



THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Students may receive academic credit for 
supervised participation in the various 
aspects of technical production, rehearsal, 
and performance of the Theatre Depart- 
ment's major presentations in the Arena 
Theatre. Credit for Theatre Practicum is 
earned on a fractional basis. Students may 
register for one-half semester hour course 
credit for active participation in a major pro- 
duction in the designated areas of technology 
and performance, limited to one semester 
hour credit per semester and eight semester 
hours over four years. Theatre Practicum 



credit may not be used to satisfy distribution 
requirements in Fine Arts. Students may not 
register for Theatre Practicum while taking 
Theatre 100 (Introduction to Theatre) or 
Theatre 148 (Play Production) without per- 
mission of the instructor. When scheduling, 
students should register for Theatre Practi- 
cum in addition to the normal four academic 
courses. Because students may not be cast or 
assigned duties in time to meet the drop/ add 
deadline, late registration for Theatre 160 
and 161 (Technical Theatre), (Rehearsal and 
Performance) will be permitted without 
penalty . 




1987 Nobel Peace Prize recipient Elie Wiesel delivered the 1987 commencement address at 
Lycoming. Dr. Wiesel received an honorary doctor of humane letters degree. 



160 TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow- 
ing technical areas; scene construction, 
scene painting, lighting, sound, properties, 
costume, make-up. A minimum of 50 hours 
is required. May be repeated for credit. One- 
half credit hour. Prerequisite: Consent of 
instructor. 

1 6 1 REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE 
PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow- 
ing rehearsal and performance areas; acting 
in a major or minor role, stage manager, 
director, assistant director, choreographer 
A minimum of 50 hours is required. May be 
repeated for credit. One-half hour credit. 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 



WOMEN'S STUDIES 

Professor: Jensen 
(Coordinator) 

Although a major is not available in 
Women's Studies, a minor is possible. 
Courses required for the minor follow: 

History 310 — Women in History 
English 334 — Women in Literature 
Psychology 341 — Psychology of 

Women 
Art 339 — Women in Art 

With approval of the coordinator, one 
of the four courses may be satisfied either 
with an independent studies project or 
with a special seminar to be offered on an 
irregular basis by interested faculty. 
Some of the possible options for a special 
seminar are Women in Religion, Women 
in Business. Women in the Professions, 
Women in Nursing, and Women in Film; 
a regularly offered course — Women in 
Politics is also possible. Whether the stu- 
dent chooses to do the Independent Stu- 
dies or a special seminar, she or he will 
be required to write an extensive research 
paper which will be subject to review by 
the Women's Studies Committee. To re- 
ceive credit for a minor in Women's Stu- 
dies, a student must maintain at least a 
2.0 average in courses taken for that 
minor. 



64 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
Professional staff members are assigned 
the specific responsibihties of: 

— career counsehng and place- 
ment; 

— residence life; 

— student activities; 

— religious life; 

— health services; 

— study skills; 

— student orientation; 

— judiciary-student conduct 

All members of the staff are available 
to counsel and advise individual stu- 
dents. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

Members of the staff of the Office of 
Student Services are qualified and avail- 
able to provide non-therapeutic assist- 
ance to students with adjustment prob- 
lems. A full-time Counseling Psycholog- 
ist provides short-term therapy for stu- 
dents needing assistance. Continuing 
therapy is available through referrals to 
public agencies and private clinicians in 
the Williamsport community. Financial 
arrangements for these referral services 
are made directly by the student with the 
agency and/or individual clinician in- 
volved. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to help 
students identify their abilities and in- 
terests, set realistic career goals, and 
plan academic programs to meet these 
goals. Counseling for Lycoming stu- 
dents begins in the freshman year. 

In addition to individual guidance, the 
center maintains a library on specific 



careers, employment outlooks, and 
career trends. Services offered by the 
center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— DISCOVER a computer assisted 
career guidance system provides in- 
formation to students about themselves 
and the world of work; 

— SHARE (Students Having a Real 
Experience), a program in which stu- 
dents observe and work with a profes- 
sional in the field; 

— placement services to aid seniors in 
implementing their career plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, and 
part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of careers to 
campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating to 
job skills and career information; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- and 
professional-school catalogs for the Un- 
ited States and abroad. 



RESIDENCE AND 
RESIDENCE HALLS 

Single students under 23 years of age 
who do not live at the home of their 
parents are required to live in residence 
halls and eat in the dining room. All new 
resident students are forwarded a room- 
agreement form to sign after confirma- 
tion of their admission to Lycoming. 
This agreement is renewed each spring. 
Residence students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of dam- 
age, health, or safety, and to search any 
room when there is reason to believe a 
violation of College rules or the law is 
occurring or has occurred. Charges are 
assessed for damage to rooms, doors, 
furniture and common areas. Wherever 
possible, damage to dormitory property 
will be charged to the person or persons 
directly responsible. Damage and break- 
age occurring in a room will be the re- 
sponsibility of students occupying the 



room. Hall and bathroom damage will be 
the responsibility of the section where 
damage occurs. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall councils 
or the Office of Student Services, are 
published in the student handbook and 
posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the Col- 
lege in cooperation with the various resi- 
dence hall councils, which share respon- 
sibility for developing and monitoring 
regulations, and which are organized 
each fall semester before visitation sche- 
dules are established. 



STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

Student Activities offers assistance 
and advice for all campus programs and 
student organizations. Through the 
efforts of the Campus Activities Board 
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for 
all facets of the student population. The 
Wertz Advisory Board oversees the 
functional aspects of the Wertz Student 
Center and works to create an atmos- 
phere which best serves the social and 
recreational needs of the students. Stu- 
dent Activities is also responsible for 
Leadership Training and the Student 
Orientation Staff; in addition, it provides 
support and direction for student govern- 
ment, the Interfratemity and Panhellenic 
Councils and the retention program. 



RELIGIOUS LIFE 

The United Campus Ministry, staffed 
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman 
Catholic Priest, provides a wide range of 
activities in support of the religious lives 
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in 
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming 
provides worship services, service pro- 
jects, social occasions, retreats, study 
opportunities and personal counseling. 
The chaplains live on campus and are 



65 



available to students for a variety of 
situations in which they might need sup- 
port, counsel or direction. 

HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the 
health service staff at the College is pro- 
vided without cost to the student. During 
the fall and spring semesters, the College 
maintains an outpatient service in Rich 
Hall. It is staffed with a registered nurse 
five days a week from 8:30 a.m. to 4 
p.m. The College physician is available 
from 11 a.m. to 12 noon, Monday 
through Friday. At other times, 
emergency care is available at the 
emergency rooms of Williamsport and 
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a 
short distance from the campus. 

Medical service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges, 
special medications. X-rays, surgery, 
care for major accidents, immunizations, 
examinations for glasses, physician's 
visits other than in the health service, 
referrals for treatment by specialists, 
special nursing services and special ser- 
vices. 

Entering students must provide basic 
health information to the College be- 
tween the time of admission and the be- 
ginning of classes of the term to which 
they are admitted. Information provided 
by the student and his/her physician is 
confidential and is available only to qual- 
ified health service and student-services 
personnel. 

All students are required to carry acci- 
dent-sickness medical insurance. Pre- 
paid medical insurance is a requirement 
for participation in intercollegiate athle- 
tics. Lycoming College does not offer a 
student plan. 



STUDENT ORIENTATION 

New students at Lycoming are re- 
quired to attend one of three summer 
orientation sessions with at least one pa- 
rent before they enroll in the fall. The 



purpose of the program is to acquaint 
new students and their parents with the 
College more fully so that new students 
begin their Lycoming experience under 
the most favorable circumstances. In- 
formation on orientation is mailed to new 
students after they confirm their admis- 
sion. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibilities required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by estab- 
lished regulations. Although the accept- 
ance of the College's standards of be- 
havior is an individual responsibility, it 
also calls for group responsibility. Stu- 
dents should influence their peers to con- 



duct themselves responsibly for the col- 
lective good. 

Students who are unable to demons- 
trate that they have accepted these re- 
sponsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed at 
any time or denied readmission for a sub- 
sequent term or semester. Further, after 
the conclusion of any term or semester, 
the College may deny a student the pri- 
vilege of attending any subsequent term 
or semester when the administration 
deems this to be in the best interest of the 
College. 

Students are given a handbook which 
contains the College's official policies, 
rules and regulations. These policies, 
rules and regulations are part of the con- 
tractual agreement students enter into 
when they register at Lycoming. 




Admissions House 



66 



Admission to Lycoming 



Lycoming College welcomes appli- 
cations from prospective students 
regardless of age, sex, race, religion, 
financial resources, color, national or 
ethnic background. 

HIGH SCHOOL SENIORS 

High school senior applicants for 
admission must complete the following 
steps: 

1) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Admission Application; 

2) Submit the non-refundable $25.00 
Admission Application Fee; 

3) Provide official transcripts from 
all high schools, and post- 
secondary schools attended: 

4) Submit official Scholastic Apti- 
tude Test (SAT), or American 
College Test (ACT) or Prueba de 
Aptitud Academica (PAA) results; 

5) Submit two (2) written evaluations 
(forms are included as part of 
admission application); 

6) Submit two (2) 100-150 word 
essays. The first essay must 
address the applicant's educational 
objectives and career goals, and 
the manner in which an education 
at Lycoming College will assist in 
achieving those objectives and 
goals. The second essay must 
focus upon a subject of importance 
to the applicant. 



TRANSFER STUDENTS 

Lycoming College considers applica- 
tions from students who have attended 
other post-secondary educational insti- 
tutions. These applicants must be in 
good academic standing and have 
earned a cumulative grade point average 
of at least 2.0 (on a 4 point scale) in 
transferable courses at the post- 
secondary institution(s) attended. 

Transfer applicants must complete 
each of the following steps: 

1) Complete the admission process 
outlined earlier for high school 
seniors; 

2) Submit official transcripts from 
each post-secondary school 
attended; 



3) Arrange for the (AWAS) to be 
completed by the Student Affairs 
Office at the last post-secondary 
school attended. 

Transfer applicants who have com- 
pleted a minimum of one full year (24 
semester or 36 quarter hours) of 
coursework which is transferable to the 
College are not required to submit SAT, 
PAA or ACT results. 

Applicants may transfer up to 64 
semester credits of lower division 
coursework, and up to 32 semester 
credits of upper division coursework for 
a total of 96 credits. Students must com- 
plete the final 32 credits of their degree 
program at Lycoming College. 

Additional information regarding the 
transfer of college credit appears on 
page 12. 



INTERNATIONAL APPLICANTS 

Prospective students who are neither 
citizens nor permanent residents of the 
United States are welcome to apply for 
admission. 

International applicants must com- 
plete each of the following steps: 

1 ) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Admission Application; 

2) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Supplemental Applica- 
tion for International Students; 

3) Submit the non-refundable 
$25.00 Admission Application 
Fee; 

4) Provide certified true copies of 
all secondary (and when applic- 
able, post-secondary) transcripts, 
mark sheets, diplomas and certi- 
ficates in the original languages, 
as well as in English (when the 
originals are not in English). 
Translations of non-English 
materials must be certified as true 
and correct; 

5) Submit two (2) written evalua- 
tions (forms are included as part 
of admission application); 

6) Submit two (2) 100-150 word 
essays. The first essay must 
address the applicant's educa- 
tional objectives and career 



goals, and the manner in which 
an education at Lycoming Col- 
lege will assist in achieving those 
objectives and goals. The second 
essay must focus upon a subject 
of importance to the applicant; 

7) Arrange for the Admission with 
Advanced Standing form 
(AWAS) to be completed by the 
Student Affairs Office at the last 
post-secondary school attended 
(if transferring from a post- 
secondary school within the 
United States); 

8) Submit of proof of adequate 
financial support from the applic- 
ant's bank and/or government. 
Please note that the minimum 
amount required for each year of 
study at Lycoming College is 
U.S. $13,500. (Applicable 
scholarships and grants are to be 
included as part of this amount); 

9) Provide proof of the ability to 
read, write and speak English at 
the college level as evidenced by 
a TOEFL score of at least 550, or 
comparable evidence of English 
language fluency; 

10) International students who are 
currently studying in the United 
States must be "in-status" with 
the United States Department of 
Justice, Immigration and Natur- 
alization Service. They must also 
be eligible to transfer to Lycom- 
ing College. 



STUDENTS WITH LEARNING 
DIFFERENCES (Sometimes Referred 
To As Learning Disabled Students) 

Each year, Lycoming College 
receives a number of applications from 
prospective students who have volun- 
tarily identified themselves as individu- 
als with learning differences. 

These prospective applicants com- 
plete the appropriate admission applica- 
tion procedure outlined earlier (for high 
school seniors, college transfers, or 
international students), except that un- 
timed SAT or ACT results may be sub- 
stituted for timed test results. 



67 



In addition they are encouraged to 
provide supplemental materials in sup- 
port of their admission application. 
These additional materials may include: 

1) Recent Wechsler Intelligence 
Scale for Children-Revised 
(WISC-R) results; 

2) Recent Wechsler Adult Intelli- 
gence Scale-Revised (WAIS-R) 
results; 

3) Recent educational, psychological 
and medical evaluations and/or 
program reports; 

4) Letters of recommendation from 
special education instructors and/ 
or counselors which address the 
compensatory strategies required 
to help insure the applicant's suc- 
cess in college. 

Finally, applicants are encouraged to 
meet with the Director of Academic 
Support Services to discuss the prog- 
rammatic offerings and services avail- 
able for students with learning differ- 
ences at the College. 



ADMISSION APPLICATION 
FILING PERIOD 

Applications for the Fall Semester 
will be accepted from June 1st of the 
preceding year through March 30th of 
the year in which studies are to begin. 
Applications for the Spring Semester are 
accepted from the preceding May 1st 
through October 3 J St. A limited number 
of applications may be considered on a 
space-available basis up to one month 
prior to the beginning of the semester. 

Applications, when complete, are 
reviewed and evaluated on a rolling 
basis. Generally, applicants are noti- 
fied, in writing, regarding the outcome 
of their applications within three weeks 
following the receipt of all required 
materials. 



ADMISSION DECISION 
CRITERIA 



tion. talents, and interests, as well as the 
College's capacity to help them achieve 
their educational objectives and career 
goals. 

Successful candidates for admission 
have typically completed a college pre- 
paratory program in high school which 
includes four years of English, three 
years of math, two years of foreign lan- 
guage, two years of natural or physical 
science, three years of social science, 
and two years of academic electives. 

In addition, successful admission 
candidates generally place in the top 
two-fifths of their high school graduat- 
ing class, and have much better than 
average SAT or ACT scores, as well as 
a better than average high school grade 
point average. 

From time to time, supplemental 
materials, as well as a personal inter- 
view may be required prior to the deter- 
mination of admissibility. 



CONFIRMATION OF INTENT 
TO ENROLL AT LYCOMING 

Admitted applicants must confirm 
their intent to enroll for the Fall Semes- 
ter no later than the preceding May 1st. 
or by November 1st for the following 
Spring Semester by submitting the 
appropriate deposit. Non-resident, com- 
muting students are required to submit a 
$100 Tuition Deposit. Resident students 
are required to submit the $100 Tuition 
Deposit, as well as a $100 Room Reser- 
vation Fee. Admitted international 
applicants are also required to submit an 
amount equal to full tuition and fees for 
the first semester of study prior to the 
issuance of the 1-20 Form. This amount, 
however, is refundable (less a postage 
and handling fee of $50) to international 
students who are unable to attend. 

Deposits are non-refundable, after 
May 1st for the following Fall Semester, 
and November 1st for the following 
Spring Semester. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their fami- 
lies are encouraged to visit the campus 
for a student-conducted tour and an 
interview with an admissions counselor, 
who will provide additional information 
about the College and answer questions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
Washington Blvd. and College Lane. 
For an appointment, telephone PA only 
1-800-235-3920; outside PA 
1-800-345-3920 or (717) 321-4026, or 
write Office of Admissions, Lycoming 
College, Williamsport, PA 17701. 
Office hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 
8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 

— May through August 

8 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays — September through April 

9 a.m. to 12 noon 

— May through August 
No Saturday hours 



Admission to Lycoming College is 
competitive. Applicants are evaluated 
on the basis of their academic prepara- 



68 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1988-89 

Application Fee — All students for 

The following expenses are effective admission must submit a $25 application 

for the regular fall and spring semesters, fee. This charge defrays the cost of pro- 

The College reserves the right to adjust cessing the application and is nonrefund- 

fees at any time . The fees for each semes- able . 

ter are payable not later than the second Admission Deposit — After students 

day of classes for the semester. have been notified of their admission to 

Lycoming, they are required to make a 

Per Per $ 1 00 admissions deposit to confirm their 

Fees Semester Year intention to matriculate. Students seek- 

Comprehensive...^. $4,220 $8,440 jng residence must submit an additional 

Board and Room Rent 1.605 3.210 . ,^„ , ■ .,, , 

-j-Q,3l 5 g25 II 650 $100 room-reservation deposit. All de- 

posits are applied to the general charges 

One-Time Student Fees for the first semester of attendance. After 

Application Fee $ 25 May 1, deposits are nonrefundable. 

Admissions Deposit 100 Contingency Deposit — A conting- 

Contingency Deposit 100 ^ deposit of $100 is required of all 

Room Reservation Deposit I00„,,.. ... . r 

^ full-time students as a guarantee tor pay- 
ment of damage to or loss of College 

Part-Time Student Fees property, for library and parking fines, or 

^ similar penalties imposed by the Col- 

EaT^un^course■;:::::;:::;::::::::::::;:::::: $1055 '^ge. The deposit is collected along with 

other charges for the initial semester. 

Additional Charges The balance of this deposit is refunded 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week after all debts to the College have been 

per semester 145 paid, either upon graduation or upon 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost written request submitted to the Registrar 

Laboratory Fee per Una Course 5 to 50 ,^^ ^^^^^ j^^. ^^ ^^^^^^ permanent 

Reregistration Fee 25 . . '^ - , 

Parking Permit (for the academic year) . 10 to 15 termination of enrollment at Lycoming 

Parking Permit with Reserved Space College. 

(for the academic year) 15 to 35 

Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

Junior Year) 270 

R O.T.C Uniform Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknel! University) 75 For the convenience of those who find 

Transcript Fee 3 it impossible to follow the regular sche- 

Health Services Fee 74 ^J^]g ^f payments, arrangements may be 

made with the College Treasurer for the 
The comprehensive fee covers the reg- monthy payment of College fees through 
ular course load of three to four courses various educational plans. Additional in- 
each semester. Resident students must formation concerning partial payments 
board at the College unless, for extraor- may be obtained from the Treasurer or 
dinary reasons, authorization is extended Director of Admissions, 
for other eating arrangements. If a dou- 
ble room is used as a single room, there is 
an additional charge of $320 per semes- 
ter. The estimated cost for books and 
supplies is up to $300 per year, depend- 
ing on the course of study. Special ses- 
sion (May term and summer term) 
charges for tuition, room, and board are 
established during the fall semester. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 

Refunds of tuition and board are made 
to students who voluntarily and officially 
withdraw from the College while in good 
standing according to the following sche- 
dule for the fall and spring semesters and 



the comparable period for the May and 
summer terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

Dunng the first week 

of the semester 80 20 

During the second and 

third week 60 40 

During the fourth and 

fifth week 40 60 

During the sixth and 

seventh week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 



NON-PAYMENT OF 
FEES PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their 
accounts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in good 
standing are issued only when a satisfac- 
tory settlement of all financial obliga- 
tions has been made in the Business 
Office. 



FINANCIAL AID 

POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded to 
individual students is the establishment 
of need. Scholarships may be awarded 
on the basis of financial need and 
academic ability, while grants are pro- 
vided on the basis of financial need. 
Long-term, low-cost educational loans 
are available from federal and stale 
sources to most students who can demon- 
strate need. Part-time employment is 
available to students. 

To apply for financial assistance, 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Ap- 
plication (FAA) from the Financial Aid 
Office and the CSS Financial Aid Form 
(FAF) and your State Grant Application 
from the secondary school Guidance 
Office or Lycoming's Financial Aid 
Office. Submit the FAA to Lycoming 



69 



and the completed FAF to the College 
Scholarship Service. CN 6300. Prince- 
ton. NJ 08541 . as early as possible after 
January 1. Renewal applications are re- 
quired annually. For additional informa- 
tion, including deadlines, see the Finan- 
cial Aid Brochure 

SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scho- 
larship is a $3,600 award honoring 
graduates of private and public secon- 
dary schools who rank either first or 
second in their graduating class as certi- 
fied by their guidance counselor. These 
awards are based upon academic 
achievement and are not contingent upon 
demonstrated financial need. Renewal 
cum is 3.25. 

Founders Scholarships of $5,000 are 
awarded to full-time Lycoming under- 
graduate students who rank in the top 
fifth of their high school graduating class 
and have combined SAT scores of at 
least 1200. Founders Scholarships are 
renewable for up to three additional years 
of continuous enrollment provided the 
student maintains a cumulative grade 
point average of 3.25. 

Recognition Scholarships for $ 1 ,000 
to $3 ,000 per year are awarded to Fresh- 
men who have superior academic qual- 
ifications and who have filed the FAF but 
did not demonstrate financial need as de- 
termined by the College Scholarship Ser- 
vice and were not eligible for another 
Lycoming Scholarship program. This 
scholarship is renewable if the recipient 
maintains a 3.00 cumulative average. 

Directors' Scholarships of $400 to 
full tuition, depending upon financial 
need, are awarded to students in the top 
fifth of their secondary school class with 
CEEB scores of 1 100 or more. Renewal 
cum is 3.00. 

Presidential Fellowships in Music 
are awarded each year to candidates 
nominated by the Department of Music. 
Auditions and interviews are conducted 
annually by the Department. A tuition 
stipend of $250 is awarded for each 
semester the student serves as a Fellow. 
The recipients are expected to fulfill re- 
sponsibilities assigned each semester by 



the Department with the primary respon- 
sibility being musical performance. To 
apply, contact the Chairman, Depart- 
ment of Music, Lycoming College. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time stu- 
dents who do not qualify for scholarships 
and who have demonstrated financial 
need and the prospect of contributing 
positively to the College community. 
Renewal requires continued financial 
need and satisfactory citizenship stan- 
dards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Methodist 
ministers and ordained ministers of other 
denominations. The grant amounts to 
one-third oftuition for children of United 
Methodist Ministers in the Central Penn- 
sylvania Annual Conference and one- 
fourth oftuition for all others. If a student 
completes the FAF, this grant will be part 
of the total aid award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of 
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to stu- 
dents preparing for the Christian ministry 
who are enrolled full time and demons- 
trate financial need. Students must com- 
plete the pre-ministerial application 
available through the Financial Aid 
Office. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College at the same time. The 
amount of 10% tuition, room, and/or 
board paid. Each member must be enrol- 
led full time and not eligible for any other 
financial aid program of the College. If a 
student is eligible for other Lycoming 
aid, the student would receive whichever 
is greater. 

Applied Music Grant was estab- 
lished anonymously to be used to offset 
music fees for select students taking ad- 
vanced study in piano. Selection of reci- 
pients will be based upon talent and 
potential in piano. 

Art and Music Scholarship of 
$ 1 ,500 is available to each new, selected 
student. It is awarded on the basis of 
juried competition and is open to high 
school juniors and seniors and to fresh- 
men and sophomore college transfer stu- 
dents. Recipient must have SATs of at 



least 850 and rank in the top 40% of their 
senior class. 

Sculpture Scholarship of $1,500 is 
available for students seeking a BFA in 
Sculpture and who successfully com- 
plete a portfolio review. Student must 
also demonstrate financial need. 

Two- Year Transfer Scholarships of 
$2,400 are awarded to the student trans- 
ferring from each two year institution 
with the best academic record. Must 
have completed a two-year program or 
64 credits and have at least a 3.25 cum 
GPA. On campus interview required. 
Renewable for one year if student main- 
tains 3.0 cum GPA. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to full-time degree apphcants 
who have a grade average of B or better, 
are active in Christian activities, are an 
active, full member of the Methodist 
Church, and have demonstrated financial 
need. The awards are normally $500 per 
year and the funds are provided by the 
United Methodist Church. Annual ap- 
plication is required. The student must 
complete and file the FAF and the scho- 
larship forms which are available in the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship 
is granted by Lycoming for $500 to a 
student chosen by the Scholarship Com- 
mittee of the Wyoming Conference. 
These are renewable for three additional 
years. Good academic performance and 
service to the church are the criteria for 
this award. 

Franklin L. Artley Scholarship 
Fund provides a scholarship for premin- 
isterial students. 

Eph and Bess Baker Scholarship 
Fund provides an annual scholarship for 
qualified students whose permanent resi- 
dence is Lycoming County. 

Ronald Beemer Memorial Scho- 
larship of $350 is periodically awarded. 

Mary Strong Clemins Scholarship 
of $250 for a student preparing for 
Christian ministry or for deaconess work 
or its equivalent in the United Methodist 
Church. 

Mabel L. Collins Scholarship of 
$250 is available for a student from Hep- 
bum Township; otherwise, to any other 
worthy student. 



70 



C. Luther Culler Memorial Scho- 
larship of $450 for a student is awarded 
based on Scholarship. 

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are 

awarded to the highest-raniced student in 
the graduating class each year from 
Hughesville High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is de- 
signated by the Hughesville Guidance 
Director. The scholarship amount is 
$2,200 and is credited at $550 per year 
over four years of attendance at Lycom- 
ing. If the student is in a three-year prog- 
ram (such as Med-Tech), (s)he will re- 
ceive the award divided equally over the 
three-years' attendance at Lycoming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships 
are awarded to the highest ranked student 
in the graduating class each year from 
Line Mountain High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is de- 
signated by the high school's guidance 
office. The scholarship is $400 per year 
for up to four years' attendance at 
Lycoming. 

Beryl Kline Glenn Scholarship of 
$300 is periodically awarded to a deserv- 
ing student majoring in music. 

David Grove and Wife Scholarship 
of $200 is periodically awarded to a 
needy student studying faith and 
ministry. 

Robert I. Hamilton Grant of $600 is 
available. Mr. Hamilton was a resident 
of South Williamsport. 

Esther M. Heefner Scholarship of 
$1,650 is available to help needy and 
deserving students. 

Edward P. Heether Scholarship 
Fund is available to help needy and de- 
serving students, who are in good 
academic standing. 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on financial 
need. Priority will be given to a chemis- 
try major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scho- 
larship for $900 is available to help de- 
fray the tuition and expenses for the first 
year only of any graduate of Cameron 
County High School (formerly Empor- 
ium High School). The selection is made 
by the Superintendent of Schools, 
Cameron, PA. 

Amos Johnson Scholarship of $100 



is available for the education of a min- 
isterial student of limited means. 

John T. and Mary Louise Keliher 
Scholarship of $200 is available for a 
deserving student "from the area." 

Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music 
Scholarship Fund is awarded in the 
ratio of 75% of the fund to financially 
needy students, in satisfactory academic 
standing, who are majoring in music or 
who are pursuing courses in vocal 
music, piano or strings, in that priority 
order. Twenty-five percent of the fund 
is awarded as needed, on the recommen- 
dation of the Music Department Facul- 
ty, to students, who in their opinion 
should be encouraged to study privately 
in the areas of voice, piano, or strings, 
in that priority order. 

LAMCO Scholarship (formerly the 
Grit) of up to $2,250 is available for 
scholarship with the following selection 
priorities: 

1. children and grandchildren of 
employess of The Grit: 

2. graduates of high schools of the 
City of Williamsport; and 

3. graduates of high schools of 
Lycoming County. 

Doris Lennon Scholarship of $1 ,800 
is available to help dedicated young stu- 
dents preparing for church work in need 
of financial assistance. 

Eva Rupert McKelvy Memorial 
Scholarship of $100 is available to help 
a worthy Christian girl. 

Mary Housenick Miller Scholar- 
ship is given to a Lycoming student 
majoring in History (preferably Ameri- 
can History) with a preference to an 
individual who has attained at least 
sophomore status. The scholarship will 
continue until graduation subject to con- 
currence from the History Department. 
Selection preference will be given but 
not limited to deserving students who 
demonstrate financial need. 

Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $800 is available to assist young 
students entering Christian work with 
preference given to students from the 
Warriors Mark and Tyrone. PA areas. 

Ada Remely Memorial Scholarship 
is an award available to a currently 
enrolled female member of the Junior 



Class having completed 80 credit hours 
with at least a 3.0 cumulative average 
and who demonstrates financial need of 
at least the regular tuition rate. Applica- 
tions are available in the Financial Aid 
Office in February and are due in 
March. The award is normally $500 
based on current earnings of the scholar- 
ship endowment. 

Jennie M. Rich Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $450 is available for worthy and 
needy students' preparing for the Chris- 
tian ministry or for deaconess or mis- 
sionary work. 

Margaret Rich and Elmer B. Staats 
Endowed Scholarship of up to $ 1 ,000 
is available to an academically talented 
student who intends to pursue a career in 
public service. Preference given, but not 
limited, to individuals who have demon- 
strated need. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro- 
vides $1,400 in grant to financially 
needy student(s) who are in satisfactory 
academic standing with primary prefer- 
ence given to Trevorton residents and 
secondary preference given to Line 
Mountain School District area students. 

Mary Landon Russell Applied 
Music Fund was established in recog- 
nition of her outstanding service to 
Lycoming College by alumni and 
friends during a special Homecoming 
celebration in 1985. this endowed fund 
provides financial assistance to quali- 
fied, talented students who seek 
advanced training in music. 

J. Milton Skeath Memorial Schol- 
arship of $250 is available for a psy- 
chology major. 

Samuel Wiilard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
degree. Preference is given to a Religion 
Major. The award varies between $400 
and $700 depending upon available 
scholarship endowment income. 

H. Merrill Winner Memorial 
Scholarship of $400 is available. 

Hiram and Elizabeth Wise Scholar- 
ship of $100 is available for a minister- 
ial or missionary student who, because 
of present circumstances and promise of 
future usefulness shall, in the judgment 



71 



of the President, be deemed worthy of 
the same. 

Dr. Paul E. Witmeyer Memorial 
Scholarship of $250 is available for a 
student interested in education. 

Donald C. Wolfe Memorial Schol- 
arship of $400 is available for a worthy 
ministerial student to be selected by the 
Trustees. 

Raymond A. and L. Marie Zim- 
merman Scholarship of $100 is avail- 
able for the benefit of students preparing 
for the Christian ministry. 

The Lycoming County Scholarship 
Fund is an endowed scholarship which 
provides interest annually to be awarded 
to students whose permanent residence 
is in Lycoming County. Preference will 
be given to entering freshmen who dem- 
onstrate financial need. Recipients will 
be selected by the Director of Financial 
Aid. 

FEDERAL AID 

Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship 

is available to residents of Pennsylvania 
who rank in the top 10 percent of their 
high school class and plan to enter the 
elementary or secondary teaching field. 
Scholarships are for up to $5,000 and the 
student must sign an agreement to teach. 
More information is available from your 
high school guidance counselor or 
Lycoming's Financial Aid Office. 

PELL Grants are awarded by the 
Federal government to eligible under- 
graduate students as determined by a 
standard Federal formula. The grants 
will range up to $2,200 for an academic 
year and are based on financial need de- 
termined by a formula developed annual- 
ly by the Education Department and re- 
viewed by Congress. Application can be 
made when submitting the Financial Aid 
Form (FAF), the PHEAA State Grant 
Application, or by .separate federal ap- 
plication on forms which are available in 
secondary school guidance offices or the 
Financial Aid Office at Lycoming. For a 
student who received his or her first Pell 
Grant award in the 1987-88 award year, 
the duration of the student's eligibility 
for a Pell Grant is limited to the full-time 
equivalentof 5 academic years of study if 



the student is enrolled in an undergradu- 
ate degree or certificate program of 4 
years or less. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants are awarded to a limited 
number of undergraduate students who 
have exceptional need. Priority must be 
given to Pell Grant recipients. The award 
range is $100 to $4,000 per year. You 
need to file the FAF or the PHEAA Grant 
application to be considered for this 
award. 

STATE AID 

Pennsylvania Higher Education 
Assistance Agency (PHEAA) Grants 

are available for Pennsylvania residents 
meeting the residency requirements and 
financial requirements of the program. 
Awards range from $100 to $1,850 per 
year for up to four years. Direct applica- 
tion to Harrisburg on the PHEAA Grant 
application is required. The deadline for 
filing to receive consideration is normal- 
ly May 1st. 

Scholars in Education Awards 
(SEA) are offered to PA residents 
through PHEAA to students who plan to 
teach math or science in Pennsylvania 
secondary schools. Must rank in the top 
fifth of your high school class, achieve at 
least a 3.0 (B) average on a 4.0 .scale in 
math or science course in high school and 
for col lege , and score at least 1 000 on the 
SATs (math must be at least 550) or on 
ACT have at least 22 in English and 27 in 
math. Award is 50% of annual tuition. 
You must agree to teach math or science 
in a Pennsylvania secondary school. If 
you fail to keep the commitment the 
grant becomes a loan with interest. High 
school seniors should contact your gui- 
dance counselor. College students 
should contact Lycoming's Financial 
Aid Office. 

Other State Aid may be available to 
assist you at Lycoming College. Mas- 
sachu.setts, Ohio, Delaware, Rhode Is- 
land, and Connecticut have programs 
which allow their residents to use state 
grants at Lycoming. Contact your secon- 
dary school guidance office for specific 
information and application forms. 



LOAN PROGRAMS 

Perkins Loan (National Direct Stu- 
dent Loan Program) permits a total of 
$9,000 to be borrowed by the under- 
graduate student at a rate not to exceed 
$4,500 the first two years. Preference 
must be given to those who have excep- 
tional need. Applicants must complete 
the FAF through the College Scholarship 
Service. The repayment period and the 
interest does not begin until six months 
after the student is graduated or ceases at 
least half-time enrollment. Loans bear 
interest at the rate of 5% simple interest. 
Repayment of the principal may extend 
over a ten-year period with the exception 
that the Program requires repayment of 
not less than $30 per month. 

The Guaranteed Student Loan 
Program (GSLP) allows students to 
borrow up to $2,625 as a freshman or 
sophomore or up to $4,000 as a junior or 
senior per academic level not to exceed 
$17,250. Currently, the Federal Govern- 
ment pays the interest while the student is 
enrolled at least half-time. The simple 
interest rate ranges from 7-10 percent 
depending upon the date you first 
obtained a loan. Repayment usually ex- 
tends over a period of up to ten years and 
begins six months after leaving school. 
Applications and information are avail- 
able from your bank or other lending 
institutions. 

PHEAA Alternative Loan of up to 
$10,000 is available to .students attend- 
ing a Pennsylvania school through 
PHEAA. Eligibility is based on your cre- 
dit qualifications and those of your cosig- 
ner. For more information contact 
PHEAA, 660 Boas Street, Harrisburg, 
PA 17102. 

PHEAA Nonsubsidized GSLs are 
available to students attending a Pennsyl- 
vania school. The interest rates are the 
same as on the Subsidized GSL; howev- 
er, the interest on the Nonsubsidized 
GSL must be paid on a quarterly basis 
while the student is enrolled in school 
and during the six-month grace period 
following the in-school period. Students 
must not be eligible for a maximum sub- 
sidized GSL and must not be packaged 
with SEOG, CWS, or Perkins Loan. The 



72 



maximum loan amount is up to $2,625 
minus GSL subsidized eligiblity for 
freshman and sophomore standing and 
$4,000 minus GSL subsidized eligibility 
for junior and senior standing. 

PLUS/SLS Loans are meant to pro- 
vide additional funds for educational ex- 
penses. The interest rate varies annually, 
but will not exceed 12%. Parents of de- 
pendent undergraduate students or inde- 
pendent undergraduates may borrow up 
to $4,000 per year to a total of $20,000. 
Applications and information are avail- 
able from your bank or other lending 
institution. 

United Methodist Student Loans are 
available on a very limited basis to stu- 
dents who are members of the United 
Methodist Church. The maximum 
amount which may be borrowed for an 
academic year is $1000 subject to availa- 
bility of funds. Information and applica- 
tions are available through the Financial 
Aid Office. 

EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 

Federal College Work-Study Prog- 
ram (CWSP) awards provide work 
opportunities on campus. The program is 
funded by Federal funds supplemented 
by Lycoming funds. Students generally 
earn $500 to $1,500 per academic year 
and are normally limited to five to twenty 
hours per week during periods of regular 
enrollment. The purpose of the program 
is to provide employment to students 
who are in need of assistance to attend 
college. Applicants must complete the 
FAF or PHEAA Grant Application and 
Lycoming's Financial Aid Application 
(FAA). 

Lycoming Campus Employment 
Program opportunities are provided on 
campus to students enrolled full time 
who are not packaged with Federal 
Work-Study jobs. The earnings range up 
to $ 1 ,500 per year. Applicants must have 
a work supervisor complete a job request 
form from the Financial Aid Office. 

Other Job Opportunities are fre- 
quently available with local business 
firms or persons. Contact the Career De- 
velopment Office of the College for in- 
formation on these opportunities. 



OTHER AID SOURCES 

Williamsport Hospital Scholarship 

provides assistance to sophomore, 
junior, or senior nursing students who 
have at least a 2.5 cum average. Students 
selected must agree to provide the Wil- 
liamsport Hospital with a minimum of 
six months of service as an employee in 
the Nursing Department for each $2,000 
per year of award received. Awards of 
greater than $2,000 per year requires one 
year of service for each year of award 
received. If the student does not work for 
the hospital, the award reverts to a loan. 

Non-College Aid Opportunities 
often are available through family em- 
ployers or labor unions, business firms, 
fraternal and religious organizations, and 
secondary schools. Contact your secon- 
dary school guidance office for informa- 
tion. Your parents should contact their 
employer and organizations of which 
they are members for information on any 
financial aid sources. 

Veterans and Dependents Beneflts 
are available for qualified veterans and 
children of deceased or disabled veter- 
ans. Application should be made to your 
nearest Veterans' Administration Office. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTO Scholarships. Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three, two, or one-year ROTC Scho- 
larships to finance tuition, books, labora- 
tory fees, and other charges with the ex- 
ception of room and board. ROTC stu- 
dents may also receive $100 per month 
stipend during the academic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends. Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program re- 
ceive $100 per academic month of their 
junior and senior years. They also re- 
ceive half of a second lieutenant's pay 
plus travel expenses for a six-week adv- 
anced summer camp between junior and 
senior years. 

Pennsylvania National Guard. Stu- 
dents participating in this program may 
be eligible for scholarship, credit prog- 
rams, educational bonus, or loan repay- 
ment. Contact a Guard Unit in your area 
for more information. 

Tuition Exchange Grants — Lycom- 



ing College is a member of both the Tui- 
tion Exchange Program and the CIC Tui- 
tion Exchange Program. These programs 
are for dependent students of employees 
at participating institutions of higher 
education. You should contact the Tui- 
tion Exchange Officer at your host in- 
stitution for information regarding spon- 
sorship. 

Education Financing Plans. The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay college expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected com- 
panies. 



73 



The Campus 



Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950, even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities — 
dates back to 1812. All buildings are 
easy to reach from anywhere on cam- 
pus. A 12-acre athletic field and football 
stadium lie a few blocks north of the 
main campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean and 
comfortable single and double rooms; 
the student union; and the physical 
education/recreation center. Up-to-date 
facilities include the library theatre, the 
planetarium, the computer center, an 
electronic-music studio, a photography 
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com- 
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal- 
lery and physical education center 
opened in 1980. An arts center was 
renovated and opened in 1983. 

RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Named in honor 
of Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of 
The United Methodist Church in Ameri- 
ca, who made the circuit through the 
upper Susquehanna District in 1812, the 
year Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Honors Lycom- 
ing's founder and first financial agent, 
the Rev. Benjamin H. Crever, who 
helped persuade the Baltimore Confer- 
ence to purchase the school from the 
Williamsport Town Council in 1848. 
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the 
chapters of Lycoming's national frater- 
nities and other students. The self- 
contained fraternity units each contain 
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room. 
All students share a large social area. 
Forrest Hall (1968) — Honors Dr. and 
Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest and Anna 
Forrest Burfiendt '30, the parents and 
sister of Katherine Forrest Mathers '28, 
whose generosity established the memo- 
rial. 

Rich Hall (1948) — Honors the Rich 
family of Woolrich, Pennsylvania. 
Houses the health service, campus 
security, mail room, and the Sara J. 



Walter Lounge for commuting students. 
The Academic Resource Center opened 
in January, 1986, and is located in the 
North Lounge on the First Floor. It is 
manned by peer tutors and professional 
staff during specified hours on Sunday 
through Friday. 

Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi- 
dence hall. Honors the late J. Milton 
Skeath, professor of psychology and 
four-time Dean of the College from 
1921 to 1967. 

Wesley Hall (1956) — Honors John 
Wesley, the founder of Methodism. 
Williams Hall (1965) — Honors Mary 
Ellen Whitehead Williams, mother of 
Joseph A. Williams, of St. Marys, 
Pennsylvania, whose bequest estab- 
lished the memorial. 

ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably 
the most architecturally impressive 
building on campus, the Center actually 
is composed of four buildings: the 
library, Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre 
and laboratories, and the faculty office 
building. 

Library (1968): An active instruction 
program acquaints students with 
academic library strategies and supports 
their specific research in each discipline 
studied. Students become familiar with 
traditional methods of research as well as 
new information technologies utilizing 
computerized CD-ROM and online sear- 
ching. The collection includes more than 
155,000 volumes, approximately 1000 
periodical titles, and a strong reference 
section suitable to an undergraduate 
education. The library also serves as a 
partial depository for U.S. government 
publications. 

Other facilities in this wing: 

Art Gallery (1980): Located in the 
northwest comer of the first floor 
of the library, the gallery contains 
exhibits year-round, including 
shows of student work. 
College Computer Center (1969): 
Located in the lower level of the 



library, the center houses a 
PRIME 9755 which replaced the 
DEC PDPll/70 in December 
1987. The PRIME 9755 has three 
315 and one 1475 megabyte disk 
drives and 1 5 megabytes of main 
memory. 

Computer Graphics Center 
(1986): The computer graphics 
center provides the IBC Ensign 
Computer for students majoring in 
computer science and for those 
taking graphics courses. It has 32 
ports for terminals and printers, 2 
megabytes of memory, and two 
85 megabyte disk drives. 
Nursing Skills Laboratory 
(1983): Located in the lower level 
of the library, it is a replica of a 
modern hospital ward, complete 
with 10 simulated work stations, a 
nurses' station, and all the medi- 
cal equipment used by nurses. 
Wendle Hall (1968): Contains 21 class- 
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a 
computer terminal laboratory with 20 
terminals available for use at present 
with an expansion capability of 20 
more, and spacious Pennington Lounge, 
an informal meeting place for students 
and faculty. 

Arena Theatre and Laboratories 
(1968): The 204-seat thrust-stage theat- 
re is one of the finest in the region. It 
includes projection facilities, scene and 
costume shops, a make-up room, and a 
multiple-use area known as the Down 
Stage, where one-act experimental plays 
are performed. The language, business, 
mathematics, and physics laboratories 
are situated on the upper floors. The 
Detwiler Planetarium is located on the 
ground floor. 

Faculty Office Building: Contains 
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a 
735-seat lecture hall. 
Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 
1983): Contains studios, sculpture 
foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop, 
classrooms, lecture hall, offices. In 
addition, the Career Development 
Office is located in this building. 

Photographic Laboratory (1984): 
Located in the lower level of the Fine 
Arts Center, it contains all the mate- 



74 



rials and equipment of any commer- 
cial laboratory. 
Mass Communication Center (1987): 
The focal point of the facility is a fully 
equipped, broadcast quality television 
studio and control room. The building 
also houses two editing rooms, a clas- 
sroom, faculty offices and the student 
newspaper office. The center is located 
on the southeast comer of campus. 
Science Building (1957): Includes the 
biology and chemistry laboratories, 
classrooms, faculty offices, a lecture 
hall, and a greenhouse. 
Clarke Building (1939): — Includes 
recital hall, music classrooms, practice 
studios, an electronic-music studio, 
faculty offices, two chapels, and the 
United Campus Ministry Center. 

ADMINISTRATION 

Drum House: Built in 1857 as a rental 
property, the Admissions House is the 
oldest and smallest building on the cam- 
pus. It was first occupied by a Presby- 
terian parson. Founded in 1812, the 
Williamsport Academy, predecessor to 
Lycoming College, was likewise Pres- 
byterian until 1848 when the institution 
was purchased by the Methodists to 
become the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary. 

The Admissions House was bought 
by the College in 1931, along with 
twenty-eight other dwellings and in 
1940 became the President's home. 
John W. Long occupied it for the 
remainder of his tenure and D. Freder- 
ick Wertz lived in the house from 1955 
until 1965 when the President's home 
was moved to 325 Grampian Boulevard. 
The building was then converted for use 
by the Fine Arts Department. In 1983. 
when a new Fine Arts facility was com- 
pleted, the department was relocated 
and the house was vacant until 1987 
when it was restored by college crafts- 
men to its original Federalist design 
under the supervision of Carol Baker 
'60, who kindly volunteered her ser- 
vices during the year-long reconstruc- 
tion. 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 
originally as the library, it now houses 



the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasurer, 
registrar, admissions, alumni affairs, 
public relations, institutional advance- 
ment, career development, publications, 
and financial aid. It includes a reception 
area, central communications, and the 
printing and bulk mail office. 

RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George 
R. Lamade Gymnasium, which contains 
basketball and other courts; a six-lane 
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sau- 
na and steam room; weight room; 
offices; classrooms, and Alumni 
Lounge. 



Wertz Student Center (1959) — Con- 
tains the main and private dining rooms, 
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area, 
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe 
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu- 
dent organization offices, and FM radio 
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick 
Wertz, president of Lycoming from 
1955 to 1968. 



RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains Clarke 
Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel, the 
United Campus Ministry Center, and 
music department studios and offices. 




75 



Academic Calendar: 1988-89 



Fall Semester 

Bills are due August 23 

Orientation of new faculty August 26 

Residence halls open August 28 

Faculty available for advising August 29 

Classes begin first period August 30 

Processing of drop/add begins August 30 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 5 

Last day for drop/add September 5 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 5 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in Spring. May, and summer terms October 10 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in fall semester 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 17 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester November 8-9-10 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 16-17-18 

Last day to withdraw from courses November 2 1 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 22 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving November 27 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 28 

Final examinations begin December 1 2 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 16 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 16 



Spring semester 

January 2 

January 8 

January 9 
January 9 
January 13 
January 13 
January 13 



February 17 
February 24 
February 24 
March 5 
March 6 

March 29, 30 
April 5-6 
April 7 



April 24 
April 28 
April 28 



Residence halls open 

Classes begin 

Last day for drop/ add 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades 

Last day to withdraw from courses 

Term ends 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m 



May term 

May 7 

May 8 

May 9 

May 9 

... May 26 

June 2 

June 2 



Summer term 

June 4 
June 5 
June 7 
June 7 
June 30 
July 14 
July 14 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 30 

All-College Carnival September 3 

Labor Day (classes in session) September 5 

Homecoming Weekend September 30, October 1 -2 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 7-8-9 

Admissions Open House October 1 

Parents Weekend October 2 1 -22-23 

Admissions Open House November 1 2 

Thanksgiving recess November 22-27 

Spring recess February 24-March 5 

Honors Day April II 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) March 24 

Baccalaureate May 7 

Commencement May 7 

Memorial Day ( no classes) May 29 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



76 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr Chairman 

Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Vice Chairman 

John C. Lundy Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D Chairman Emeritus 

Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Emeriti Trustees 

Samuel Evert Bloomsburg 

Paul Gilmore Williamsport 

Kenneth Himes Wiliamsport 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps, II Williamsport 

George L. Steams, II Williamsport 

The Rev. Wallace F. Stettler, H.H.D Kingston 

W. Russell Zacharias Allentown 

Trustees 
Elected Term expires 1989 
1986 Harold D. Chapman Williamsport 

1986 Richard H. Confair Williamsport 

1980 Richard W, DeWald Montoursvilie 

1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford, NY 

1970 John E. Person, Jr Williamsport 

1983 Mary R. Schweikle. M.D. (Alumni Representative) Montoursvilie 

1972 Donald E. Shearer, M.D Montoursvilie 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith Williamsport 

1961 Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Williamsport 

1971 Willis W. Willard, III, M.D Carlisle 

Elected Term expires 1990 

1987 Leo Calistri '59 (Alumni Representative) Fayetteville, NY 

1987 Robert E. Hancox Malvern 

1987 K. Alan Himes Williamsport 

1987 Richard D. Mase Blossburg 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr Williamsport 

1978 JohnC. Lundy Williamsport 

1984 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville 

1981 William Pickelner Williamsport 

1985 Robert L. Shangraw Williamsport 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr Jenkintown 

Elected Term expires 1991 

1979 David Y. Brouse Montoursvilie 

1988 Gerald Hawk '66 (Alumni Representative) Franklin, MA 

1982 Margaret D. L'heureux Williamsport 

1973 RobertG. Little, M.D Harrisburg 

1988 David B. Lee '61 State College 

1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D Baltimore, MD 

1958 Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1988 Ann S. Pepperman Williamsport 

1988 Ted Reich Williamsport 

1982 Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich 

1988 JohnC. Schultz Williamsport 

1988 Richard Stamm '76 Philadelphia 

1988 Jeanne Twigg '74 Montoursvilie 

1988 John M. Young Williamsport 



77 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 



FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 
President 

B.A., Millsaps College; 
B.D.. Ph.D., Emory University 
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 
Dean of the College 
B.A., Mundelein College: 
M.A.. Northwestern University: 
M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 
WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 
Treasurer 

B.S.. Lvcoming College 
J. BARTON MEYER (1984) 

Executive Director for College Advancement 
B.A.. Ohio Northern University: 
M.S.. University of Dayton 
BETTY S. BECK (1965) 

Bookstore Manager 
DALE V. BOWER (1968) 
Director of Planned Giving 
B.S.. Lycoming College: 
B.D. United Theological Seminary 
LOU ANN BRADEN (1986) 

Senior Admissions Associate for On-Campus Programs 
B.A.. Seton Hill College 
JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 
Dean Emeritus 
A.B.. Juniata College: 
M.S.. S\racu.se University 
PATRICIA L. BURGER (1987) 

Assistant Dean for Student Activities 
A.B.. Lycoming College: 
M.Ed.. West Chester University 
WILLIAM E. BYHAM (1987) 
Sports Information Director 
B.S.. Bloomsburg University 
DANIA CABRERA (1988) 

Coordinator of Residence Life and Conferences 
B.A.. SUNY at New Paltz 
ROBERT CHECCA (1986) 
Registrar 

B.A.. M.S. SUNY at Plattsburgh 
RITA CIRULINO (1984) 
Director of Admissions 
A.B.. Lvcoming College 
JANE A. CUNNION (1988) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations 
B.A.. Shippensbiirg University 



ROBERT L. CURRY (1969) 
Associate Director of Athletics 
A.B.. Lycoming College 
JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 
B.A.. M.Ed., Western Maryland College 
GARY W. GATES (1985) 

Associate Dean for Campus Life 

B.S., M.A., Indiana University 

of Pennsylvania 
FRANK L. GIRARDI (1984) 

Director of Athletics 

B.S., West Chester State College 
DANIEL J. HARTSOCK (1986) 

Director of Writing Center and Coordinating Advising 

B.A., The Pennsylvania State University: 

M.A.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
ALICE HEAPS (1986) 

Senior School Relations Associate 

B.S., Shippenshurg University 
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 

Director of Computer Services 

B.S., Wake Forest College: 

M.A., University of Kansas 
MARY HERRING (1978) 

Senior Admissions Associate for Financial 
Aid Counseling 

B.A., Albright College: 

M.A., Bloomsburg University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A., The Citadel: 

M.S.L.S., Florida State University 
HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 

President Emeritus 

B.A., LL.D., Wofford College: 

B.D., Duke University: 

Ph.D., University of Chicago: 

L.H.D., Ohio Wesleyan University 
JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 

Senior Admissions Associate for Internal Operations 

B.A., Susquehanna University 
MARK N. LEVINE(1985) 

Director of Public and Media Relations 

B.A.. The American University: 

M.S.J. . Northwestern University 
CHRISTINA E. MacGILL ( 1985) 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations 

A.B., Lycoming College 

M.S.. Bucknell University 
SAMUEL McKELVEY (1986) 

Director of Safety and Security 

B.S., Central Missouri State 



78 



RALPH F. MILLER (1985) 


FACULTY 


Director of Administrative Services 




WALTER D. NYMAN{1987) 




Director of Grounds and Buildings 


EMERITI 


A.D.. Williamspori Area Community College 




R. MICHAEL O'BRIEN (1987) 


LEROY F. DERR 


Dean of Student Services 


Professor Emeritus of Education 


A.B.. University of Chattanooga 


A.B.. Ursinus College; M.A.. Bucknell University; 


B.D.. Southern Methodist University 


Ed.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


S.T.M.. Southern Methodist University 


ROBERT H. EWING 


Ed.D., University of Tennessee 


Professor Emeritus of History 


JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 


A.B.. College ofWooster; M.A.. University' 


Senior Associate for Financial Aid 


of Michigan; HH.D.. Lycoming College 


A.B.. Lycoming College: 


JOHN P. GRAHAM 


M.A.. Bucknell University 


Professor Emeritus of English 


MARGARET PIPER (1987) 


Ph.B.. Dickinson College; 


Director of Academic Support Services 


M.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 


B.S.. East Carolina University; 


HAROLD W. HAYDEN 


M.S.. Bloomsburg University 


Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus 


ROBERT ROTH (1986) 


of Library Services 


Admissions Counselor 


A.B.. Nebraska State Teachers College; B.S.. University 


B.S., Ohio University 


of Illinois; M. A. in L.S.. University of Michigan 


JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK 


Controller and Assistant Treasurer 


Professor Emeritus of Business 


A.B.. Lycoming College 


Administration 


KIMBERLY L. ROCKEY (1985) 


B.S.. M.B.A.. Universit}' of Pennsylvania 


Assistant Director of Women's Athletics 


GEORGE W. HOWE 


B.S., Taylor University 


Professor Emeritus of Geology 


M.S.. Indiana University 


A.B.. M.S.. Syracuse University; 


JUDD STAPLES (1987) 


Ph.D.. Cornell University 


Dean of Admissions and Financial Aid 


JAMES K. HUMMER 


B.A.. Pepperdine University 


Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 


M.P.A.. Pepperdine University 


B.N.S.. Tufts University; 


DEBORAH E. WEAVER (1978) 


M.S.. Middlebury College; 


Manager, Residence Halls Operations 


Ph.D., University' of North Carolina 


CATHLEEN WILD (1977) 


M. RAYMOND JAMISON 


Assistant Instructional Services Librarian 


Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 


B.A.. The College ofWooster; 


B.S.. Ursinus College; M.S.. Bucknell Universit}- 


M.S.. Columbia University 


WALTER G. McIVER 


FAITH K. WILSON (1987) 


Professor Emeritus of Music 


School Relations/Minority Student Admissions 


Mus.B.. Westminster Choir College; A. B.. Bucknell 


Associate 


University; M.A.. Nevf York University 


B.A.. Pennsylvania State University; 


ROBERT W. RABOLD 


M.Ed., Pennsylvania State University 


Professor Emeritus of Economics 


RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 


B.A.. The Pennsylvania State Universit}-; 


Director of Development for Annual Support 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Universit}' of Pittsburgh 


A.B., Lycoming College; 


JOHN A. RADSPINNER 


M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 


Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 


GAIL M. ZIMMERMAN (1984) 


B.S., Universit}' of Richmond; 


Director of Prospect Research 


M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute; 


B.S.. SUNY at Cortland 


D.S., Carnegie Mellon Institute 



79 



LOGAN A. RICHMOND 


JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 


Professor Emeritus of Accounting 


Chemistry 


B.S.. Lycoming College: 


B.N.S. Tufts University: 


M.B.A.. New York University: 


M.S.. Middlebury College: 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 


Ph.D.. University of North Carolina 


MARY LANDON RUSSELL 


EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


English 


Mus. B.. Susquehanna Universin Conservatory of 


B.A.. Jamestown College: 


Music: M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 


M.A.. Universit}- of Denver: 


LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 


Ph.D.. The Penn.sylvania State University 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 


ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 


A.B.. Lvcoming College: M.A.. Bucknell University: 


History 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania Slate University 


B.A.. The Citadel: 


JAMES W. SHEAFFER 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963) 


B.S.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania: 


Economics 


M.S.. University of Pennsylvania 


A.B.. Hofstra University: 


FRANCES K. SKEATH 


M.A.. Columbia University: 


Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 


A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University: 


JOHN F. PIPER. JR. (1969) 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 


History 


JOHN A. STUART 


A.B.. Lafayette College; 


Professor Emeritus of English 


B.D.. Yale University: 


B.A.. William Jewell College: 


Ph.D.. Duke University 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Northwestern University 


RODGER D. SHIPLEY (1967)** 


HELEN B. WEIDMAN 


Art 


Professor Emeritus of Political Science 


B.A.. Otterbein College: 


A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University: 


M.F.A.. Cranbrook Academy of Art 


Ph.D.. Syracuse University 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 




English 


PROFESSORS 


Dean of the College 
B.A.. Mundelein College: 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


M.A.. Northwestern University: 


Biology 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


6.5., Ursinus College: 


STANLEY T. WILK(1973) 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Cornell University 


Anthropology 


ROBERT F. FALK(1970) 


B.A.. Hunter College: 


Theatre 


Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


Marshal of the College 
B.A.. B.D.. Drew University: 


**0n Sabbatical Spring Semester 1989 
***0n Leave of Absence 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Wayne State University 


ERNEST D. G1GL10(1972) 




Political Science 




B.A.. Queens College: 




M.A.. SUNY at Albany: 




Ph.D.. Syracuse University 


ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 


EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 




Religion 


JERRY D. ALLEN (1984) 


B.D.. Southern Methodist University: S.T.M., 


Theatre 


Ph.D.. Union Theological Seminary 


BE. A.. ME. A.. Utah State University 


JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 


SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 


Psychology 


Collection Management Services Librarian 


B.S.. M.S.. Bucknell University: 


B.A.. University of Delaware: 


Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania State Universit\' 


M.L.S.. University of Pittsburgh 



80 



HOWARD C. BERTHOLD. JR. (1976) 

Psychology 

B.A.. Franklin and Marshall College; 

M.A.. University of Iowa: 

Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts 
GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 

Music 

B.A.. B.M.. Oberlin College: 

M.M., Ohio University: 

D.M.A.. University of Iowa 
JON R. BOGLE (1976) 

Art 

8. FA., B.S., M.F.A.. Tyler School of Art: 

Temple University 
CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 

Physical Education 

B.S., M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh 
JACK D. DIEHL, JR. (1971) 

Biology 

6.5.. M.A., Sam Houston State University: 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Connecticut 
RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 

Astronomy and Physics 

B.A., University of Minnesota: 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
BERNARD P. FLAM (1963)*** 

Spanish 

A.B., New York University: 

M.A., Harvard University: 

Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 

Chemistry 

Marshall of the College 

A.B., Princeton University: 

M.A.T., The Johns Hopkins University: 

Ph.D., University of Virginia 
EDWARD G. GABRIEL (1977) 

Biology 

B.A., M.A., Alfred University: 

M.S.. Ph.D., The Ohio State University 
CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967)*** 

Mathematics 

B.S., University of Massachusetts: 

M.A., Ph.D., Harvard University 
STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 

Philosophy 

Director of Lycoming Scholars 

A.B., Cornell University: 

M.A.. Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 

Mathematics 

B.A.. Acadia University: 

M.S.. Ph.D., Queen's University: 

Habil. , Universitat Mannheim 



RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 

Religion 

B.A.. University of Indianapolis: 

S.T.B., Ph.D.. Boston University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A.. The Citadel: 

M.S.L.S.. Florida State University 
MOON H. JO (1975) 

Sociology 

8. A.. Valparaiso University': 

M.A.. Howard University: 

Ph.D.. New York University 
ELDON F. KUHNS. II (1979) 

Accounting 

A. 8.. Lycoming College: M. Accounting, 

University of Oklahoma: C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 
PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970)** 

German 

A. 8.. A.M.. Ph.D.. Boston University 
ROBERT J. B. MAPLES (1969) 

French 

A. 8.. University of Rochester: 

Ph.D.. Yale University 
RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976) 

History 

B.A.. Boston Slate College: 

M.A., Ohio University': 

Ph.D.. New York University' 
DAVID J. RIFE (1970) 

English 

8. A.. University of Florida: 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Southern Illinois University 
MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972) 

Political Science 

A. 8.. University of California at Berkeley: 

M.A.. University of California at Los Angeles: 

Ph.D.. The American University 
GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981)** 

Mathematics 

B.S.. Wilkes College: 

M.A.. Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 
FRED M. THAYER. JR. (1976) 

Music 

A. 8.. Syracuse University: 

B.M., Ithaca College: 

M.M.. SUNY at Binghamton: 

D.M.A.. Cornell University 

H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 
Business Administration 
8. 8. A.. Stetson University: 
J.D.. Vanderbilt University: 
M.B.A.. Florida Technological University 



81 



JOHN M. WHELAN. JR. (1971) 


KAREN S. G1NGR0W(1985) 


Philosophy 


Nursing 


B.A.. University of Notre Dame: 


B.S.. M.S.. Vanderbilt University 


Ph.D.. The Universit}' ofTe.xas at Austin 


AMY GOLAHNY (1985) 


ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 


An 


Biology 


B.A.. Brandeis University: 


B.A.. Bridgewater College: 


M.A.. Williams College — Clark Art Institute: 


Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


M.Phil., and Ph.D.. Columbia University 


MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979)** 


THOMAS J, HENNINGER (1966) 


Biology 


Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 


B.S.. SUNY at Cortland: 


B.S.. Wake Forest College: 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Miami University 


M.A.. University- of Kansas 




OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 


**On Sabbatical Spring Semester I9H9 


Philosophy 


***On Leave of Absence 


B.A.. Wake Forest College 




JANET HURLBERT (1985) 




Instructional Services Librarian 




B.A.. M.A.. University of Denver 


ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 


GRANT L. JEFFERS(I983) 




Music 


BERNARD J. BALLEWEG (1985) 


B.A.. Williams College: 


Psychology 


M.M.. University of Cincinnati: 


B.S.. Colorado State University: 


Ph.D.. University of California. Los Angeles 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Montana 


WILLIAM E. KEIG (1980) 


RICHARD J. BARKER (1982) 


Astronomy and Physics 


Spanish 


A.B.. University of California at Santa Cruz: 


B.A.. Hamilton College: 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


M.A.. Universin,- of Iowa : 


JANE LAWRENCE (1986) 


Ph.D.. University of Oregon 


Sociology 


STEVEN BIDLAKE (1988) 


B.A., College of St. Catherine. University of Minnesota: 


English 


M.S.W.. Rutgers University 


B.A.. Western Washington University: 


LINDA LONCARIC (1987) 


M.A.. University of Oregon: 


Education 


Ph.D.. University of Washington 


B.S.Ed.. M.Ed.. Slippery Rock State College: 


ANDRZEJ J. BUCKI (1986) 


Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


Mathematics 


MEHRDAD MADRESEHEE (1986) 


B.S.. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University: 


Economics 


M.S.. Ph.D. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University: 


B.S.. University of Tehran: 


JOSEPH H. BULARZIK (1987) 


M.S.. National University of Iran: 


Chemistry 


M.S.. Universit}' of Idaho: 


B.S.. Arizona State University 


Ph.D.. Washington State University 


Ph.D.. University of California. Berkeley 


CHRiss McDonald (i987) 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 


Chemistry 


Education 


B.S.. Manchester College: 


B.S.. Mansfield State College: 


Ph.D.. Miami University of Ohio 


M.A.. New York University 


CAROLE MOSES (1982) 


SANTUSHT S. DeSILVA (1983) 


English 


Mathematics 


B.A.. Adelphi Universit}': 


B.Sc. University of Sri Lanka: 


M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University: 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 


DAVID FISHER (1984) 


BRADLEY NASON (1983) 


Physics 


Mass Communication 


B.S.. The Pennsylvania State University: 


A.B.. Lycoming College: 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Delaware 


M.A.. The American University 



82 



KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982) 


INSTRUCTORS 


Nursing 




B.S.N. . University of Maryland 


SALLY ANN ATKINSON ( 1983) 


M.S.N. . University of Pennsylvania 


Nursing 


Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 


B.S.N. . Te.xas Woman's University: 


DORIS P. PARRISH (1983) 


M.S.N. . University of Te.xas. 


Nursing 


Health Science Center at San Antonio 


B.S.. SUNY at Plattsburgh: 


SHARON AUKER 


M.S.. Russell Sage College 


Nursing 


Ph.D., University of Te.xas at Austin 


B.S.N. , 


JUDITH A. PO IT MEYER (1984) 


M.S.N. . The Pennsylvania State University 


Biology 


PENELOPE AUSTIN ( 1988) 


B.S., Clarion State College: 


English 


Ph.D., Washington State University 


A.B., University of Michigan: 


CHARLES T. RYAN (1988) 


MB.. University of Missouri-Columbia 


Mathematics 


MICHELLE S. FICCA (1985) 


B.S.. Bridgewater State College 


Nursing 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Northeastern University 


B.S., Stroudsburg State University: 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 


M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University 


Psychology 


MARGARET GRAY-VICKREY (1986) 


B.S., University of Illinois: 


Nursing 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


B.S.N. . SUNY at Plattsburgh 


ARTHUR STERNGOLD 


M.S.. Northern Illinois University 


Business 


DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 


B.A., Princeton University 


Physical Education 


MB. A.. Northwestern University 


6.5.. M.S.. The Pennsylvania State University 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 




Sociology 




y4.fi., Lycoming College: 


LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 


M.P.A.. University of Arizona 




RICHARD WEIDA (1987) 


RONDA L. BIRD, R.D. (1986) 


Mathematics 


B.A., Indiana University' 


B.S.. Muhlenberg College: 

M.S.. Ph.D., University' of Delaware 


DON M. LARRABEE 11, (1972) 
Lecturer in Law 


BUDD F. WHITEHILL (1957) 
Physical Education 


A.B.. Franklin and Marshall College: 
LL.B.. Fordham University 


B.S.. Lock Haven University: M.Ed., 


GERARD M. McKEEGAN 


The Pennsylvania State University 


Nursing 

B.S.. Philadelphia College of Pharmacy 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 


Accounting 


and Science 


A.B., Lycoming College: 




M.S., Bucknell University 




M.S. A.. Long Island University: 


PART-TIME FACULTY 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania and New York) 




FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978) 


JOAN MOYER CLARK ( 1987) 


English 

B.A., Emory University: 


Music and Theatre 


ROGER DAVIS (1984) 


M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University: 


Mathematics 


M.Div., Yale Divinity School 


B.S.Ed.. Clarion State College 




M.S.Ed., Bucknell University' 




JOHN E. DICE (1986) 




Education 




B.S., Lock Haven State Teacher's College 




M.S.. Bucknell University 



83 



ROME A. HANKS (1982) 


GRACE KINGSBURY MUZZO (1986) 


Art 


Piano 


B.A.. M.F.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


B.M.E.. Gordon College 


SANDRA G. LAKEY (1983) 


M.M.. Westminster Choir College 


English 


ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 


B.S.. M.Ed.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania 


Brass 


JAMES E. LOGUE( 1983) 


B.A., in Music Education, Mansfield University 


English 


M.S., in Music Education, Ithaca College 


B.A.. M.A.. Bucknell University 


MARY L. RUSSELL (1936) 


R. TIM MARKS (1986) 


Music 


Education 


B.S.. Susquehanna University Conservatory of Music 


B.S.. M.S.Ed.. Clarion State College 


M.A., The Pennsylvania Stale University 


D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 


LINDA L. SWOPE (1987) 


KENNETH R. RAESSLER (1987) 


Woodwinds 


Music 


B. Mus., Susquehanna University 


B.S.. West Chester University 


M.M.. University of Miami 


M.M.E.. Temple University 


JUDITH A. WHITE 


Ph.D.. Michigan State University 


Voice 


KEN SAWYER (1983) 


B. Mus., Susquehanna University 


Mass Communication 


EDWIN E. ZDZINSKK 1987) 


THOMAS M. SHIVETTS (1986) 


Violin 


Education 


B.S., SUNY at Fredonia 


B.S.. Lycoming College 


M.A.. Columbia University Teachers College 


M.S.Ed.. Bucknell University 


Ed.D., Columbia University Teachers College 


DALE K. WAGNER (1985) 


ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 


Business Administration 




B.A.. M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 


BROOKE BARRIE (1984) 


TODD WHITEHILL( 1986) 


Sculpture 


Mass Communication 


Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 


B.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 


JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984) 


M.S.. Syracuse University 


Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre 


MARY WOLF (1985) 


B.A., in Studio Art, B.A.. in Theatre. 


Political Science 


Bloomsburg University 


B.A.. St. Mary's College 


JON LASH (1984) 


M.P.A.. University of Michigan 


Sculpture 


JENNIFER YEAGER(1984) 


Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 


Foreign Language 


ANDRZEJ PlTYNSKl (1984) 


B.S.Ed., University of Alabama 


Sculpture 




Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 




HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984) 


APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 


Sculpture 




Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 


DIANA L. BAILEY (1986) 




Saxophone 


MEDICAL STAFF 


B.S.. Susquehanna Universitv 


FREDERIC C. LECHNER. M.D. 


G. LOU FEIST (1987) 


College Physician 


Percussions 


B.S.. Franklin and Marshall College: 


GARY GUTH (1987) 


M.D.. Jefferson Medical College 


Guitar 


ROBERT S. YASUI, M.D. 


B.S., MM., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 


College Surgeon 


RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 


M.D.. Temple University 


Organ and Piano 


EVELYN L. SEAMAN, R.N. 


A.B.. Westminster Choir College: M.A.. 


College Nurse 


Indiana University of Pennsylvania 


Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing 



84 



ATHLETICS STAFF 

JANIS ARP Field Hockey Coach 

Men/Women's Swim Coach 

CLARENCE W. BURCH Mens Basketball Coach 

JIM BURGET Men/Women's Cross Country Coach 

ROBERT L. CURRY Associate Athletic Director 

REES DANEKER Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

STEVE DEWAR Assistant Football Coach 

Assistant Men/Women's Track Coach 

ROBERT L. GEORGE Assistant Football Coach 

FRANK L. GIRARDI Athletic Director. 

Head Football Coach 

DR. JACK FISHER Assistant Football Coach 

GENE H AUPT Assistant Football Coach 

EUGENE HENDERSCHED Head Golf Coach 

DEBORAH J. HOLMES Women's Tennis Coach 

Intramural Director 
MICHAEL HUDOCK .. Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

TERRY MANTLE Assistant Footbal Coach 

JOSEPH G. MARK Head Mens Tennis Coach 

J. SCOTT McNEIL Head Soccer Coach 

DAN PETRA Athletic Trainer 

WADE POTTER Assistant Wrestling Coach 

KIMBERLEY ROCKEY Women's Athletic Director 

Head Women's Basketball Coach 

BUDD WHITEHILL Head Wrestling Coach 

STEVEN R. WISER Assistant Head Football Coach 

Head Men/Women's Track Coach 

ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 

Dianna L. Artley Secretary/ Admin. Ass't. 

in Financial Aid 

Pamela J. Badger Data Entry Clerk 

Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Trudy L. Beachem Gift Records Specialist 

Theresa M. Beatty Faculty Secretary in Science 

Nathalie Beck Executive Secretary, Development 

Patricia A. Belknap Executive Secretary, Student Services 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator 

Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Helen J . Bee Typist/Clerk Admissions 

Marlene Bowen AV/ILL Library Assistant 

Barbara Bowes Admin. Assistant Bookstore 

Carol E. Bubb Assistant to 

Director of Admin. Services 

Peter A. Buckle Security Proctor 

Barbara J. Carlin Executive Secretary, Admissions 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

June V. Creveling Secretary, Buildings & Grounds 

Mary Dahlgren Ass't. for Admissions/ 

Computer Applications 



Richard C. Dingle SUB Desk Aide 

Julia E. Dougherty Circulation Assistant, Library 

Gladys Engel Secretary, Theatre Department 

Lisa R. Engel Public Relations Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary, Nursing Department 

Robert W. Faus Ass't. Press Operator & 

Ass't. Mailroom Clerk 

S. Jean Gair Secretary, Music and Art Department 

Imre Gajari, Jr Computer Programmer/Operator 

Donald L. Gephart Security Proctor 

Dee L. Given Faculty Secretary 

John E. Gohrig Assistant to Dir. of Admin. 

Services (Mailroom) 

Letty W. Gray Admin. Assistant 

in Financial Aid Office 

Diane Hassinger Executive Secretary to 

Dean of College 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger Data Entry Clerk 

Bemadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director 

Gladys E. Knauss SUB Desk Aide 

Diane M. Kuttenberg .. Coordinator of Computer Services 

for Mathematical Sciences 

Gale D. Laubacher Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Peggie A. LeFever Tech. Assistant/Secretary 

to Dir. of Admin. Services 

Abby S. Levine Reference Assistant, Library 

Lorraine Little Admin. Assistant in 

Student Activities 

Shirley D. Lloyd Relief Switchboard Operator 

Carol A. Long Admin. Assistant, 

Alumni & Parent Relations 

Rebecca J. Lyons Sec. /Admin. Ass't. to 

Director of Safety & Security 

Dorothy E. Maples Box Office Manager 

D. Maxine McCormick Recorder 

Glenn E. McCreary Slide Clerk, Art 

Ellen Moon Executive Secretary to President 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Carol T. Murray Coordinator of Academic 

Computer Services 

Judith E. Noble Library Acquisitions Assistant 

Marion R. Nyman Bursar/Executive Secretary 

to Treasurer 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

Madeline A. Pinkerton SUB Desk Aide 

Constance C. Plankenhom Secretary to the Registrar 

David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of 

Buildings and Grounds 

Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Fern L. Schon Loan Coordinator, Business Office 

Galen W. Seaman, Sr Mailroom Assistant 

Anna L. Seidel Alumni Records Clerk 

Regina D. Shaffer Secretary to Residence Life Office 



85 



Galen W. Seaman, Sr Mailroom Assistant 

Anna L. Seidel Alumni Records Clerk 

Regina D. Shaffer Secretary to Residence Life Office 

Patricia Strauss-Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Carole A. Thompson Faculty Secretary 

Glenn F. Trick Security Guard Supervisor 

Patricia J. Triaca Cataloging Assistant, Library 



Sharon A. Vedder Computer Programmer/Operator 

Kathleen M. Watt ". SUB Desk Aide 

Geraldine H. Wescott Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Donald R. Whitford, Jr Athletic Trainer 

Laurence C. Wilcox, Jr Security Proctor 

Patricia S. Wittig Secretary, Campus Ministry Center 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant/Night 

Circulation Supervisor 




86 



1988-89 Alumni Association 
Executive Board 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a mem- 
bership of nearly 1 1 ,000 men and women. It is governed by 
an executive board consisting of 24 members-at-large, 
elected through mail ballot by the membership of the associ- 
ation. The board also has members representing specific 
geographic areas, the senior class president, the student body 
president, and past presidents of the last graduating class and 
the Student Association of Lycoming College. The associa- 
tion annually designates one alumni representative as a nomi- 
nee for a three-year term on the College Board of Trustees. 
The Director of Alumni and Parent Relations directs the 
activities of the alumni office. The Alumni Association has 
the following purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an 
off-campus constituency, the association's purpose is to seek 
ways of maintaining an active and mutually beneficial rela- 
tionship between the College and its alumni, utilizing their 
talents, resources and counsel to further the objective and 
program of Lycoming College." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed one 
year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior College or 
Lycoming College are considered members of the associa- 
tion. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus and 
working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is 
responsible for keeping alumni informed and interested in the 
programs, growth, and activities of the College through reg- 
ular publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrange- 
ments for Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, and 
similar activities are coordinated through this office. Through 
the Lycoming College Fund, the alumni office is closely 
associated with the development program of the College. 
Communications to the alumni association should be 
addressed to the Office of Alumni and Parent Relations. 



1988-89 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE BOARD 

Term Expires October 1989 

David G. Argall '80 — 237 West Broad Street, Tamaqua, 
PA 18252 

David E. Detwiler '75 — 134 Sunset Ridge, Forest, VA 
24551 

Robert J. Clunk '59 — R.D. #3, Jersey Shore, PA 17740 

Patricia MacBride Krauser '68 — 40 Steffie Drive, Mt. 
Wolf PA 1747 

Jacquelyn Snyder Nowak '58 — 505 Geary Avenue, New 
Cumberland, PA 17070 

Mary Landon Russell '33 — 812 Lincoln Avenue, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 

D. Keigh Cronauer Strauser '58 — 1160 Almond Street. 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

Doris Heller Teufel '54 — R.D. #1. POB 852. Williams- 
port. PA 17701 



Term Expires October 1990 

Romain F. Bastian '61 — POB 314. Milton. PA 
17847-0314 

Richard H. Felix '56 — 1230 Pennsylvania Avenue. Wil- 
liamsport. PA 17701 

Ronald A. Frick '83 — 724 Pennsylvania Avenue. Williams- 
port. PA 17701 

William S. Kieser '65 — R.D. #1. Box 245, Steam Valley 
Mt., Trout Run, PA 17771 

Everett W. Rubendall "37 — 308 E. Central Avenue. South 
Williamsport. PA 17701 

Robert E. Ruffaner '63 — 1620 Spring Lane. Williamsport, 
PA 17701 

Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer '43 & '63 — 47 E. Houston 
Avenue. Montgomery. PA 17752 

Douglas P. Trump '76 — 49 Talmadge Ave.. Chatham. NJ 
07928 

Term Expires October 1991 

Cynthia Pennington Clippinger '66 — 16 Mumma 
Avenue. Mechanicsburg. PA 17055 

Mark A. GaNung '85 — 327 Brandon Avenue. Williams- 
port. PA 17701 

Mark A. Gibbon '83 — 1514 Faxon Parkway. Williamsport. 
PA 17701 

John G. Hollenback '47 — 721 Sixth Avenue. Williamsport. 
PA 17701 

Eleanor Layton Loomis '60 — R.D. #1 . Box 439. Bohlayer 
Orch. Troy. PA 16947 

Carolyn-Kay Miller Lundy '63 — 501 Upland Road. Wil- 
liamsport. PA 17701 

Otto L. Sonder. Jr. '46 — 52 West Street. Oneonta. NY 
13820 

Jean R. Alpert Staiman '47 — 135 Grampian Boulevard, 
Williamsport. PA 17701 

Members of the Board 

Serving a One -Year Term ' 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC). Presi- 
dent — Michael P. Holland — 27 Greendale Road. Cedar 
Grove. NJ 07009 

Senior Class President — Amanda L. Gates — 141 Alger 
Road. East Haddam. CT 06423 

1988 Class President — Cynthia J. Smith — 147 Westville 
Avenue. Caldwell. NJ 07006 

Immediate Past President of SALC — Matthew J. Drakeley 
'88 — 615 Brumar Drive. Hatboro. PA 19040 

Area Alumni Representatives 

Kent T. Baldwin '64 — Greater Williamsport 

929 Grampian Blvd.. Williamsport. PA 17701 
Patrick J. Cerillo '77 — Northern New Jersey 

R.D. #3. Box 160. Rt. 523. Flemington. NJ 08822 



87 



Amy Gehron Chambers "70 — Pittsburgh 

1515 Buena Vista. Pittsburgh, PA 15^212 
Ann Weitzel Fuhrman "79 — Southcentral Pennsylvania 

2214 Boxwood Lane, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055 
Barry C. Hamilton '70 — Greater Philadelphia 

7 Fenimore Lane, St. Davids. PA 19087 
Robert & Marjorie Ferrell Jones "48 & "50 — 

Syracuse/Rochester Area 

298 Park Place. Caledonia. NY 14423 



Charles J. Kocian "50 — Washington. D.C. 

2000 F St.. NW #103. Washington. DC 20006 
Kimberly Martin Koehl '78 — Southern New Jersey 

24 Orchard Lane. Mt. Holly. NJ 08060 
James G. Scott '70 — New England 

3 Waterside Lane. West Newbury. MA 01985 




88 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 76 

Academic Honesty 11 

Academic Honors 12 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 11 

Accounting Curriculum 23 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) .... 24 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 85 

Administrative Staff 78 

Admission 67 

Admissions Deposit 69 

Admissions Office 68 

Admission Policy 67 

Admission Standards 67 

Advanced Placement 12 

Advanced Standing by Transfer .... 67 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 9 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technoloy 9 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 9 

American Studies (EIM) 24 

Anthropology Curricululm 60 

Application Fee and Deposits 69 

Application Process 67 

Applied Music Requirements 51 

Art Curriculum 25 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 27 

Athletics Training 56 

Athletic Staff 85 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 30 

Board of Trustees 77 

Books and Supplies 69 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum 32 

Campus Facilities 74 

Capitol Semester 19 

Career Development Services 65 

Chemistry Curriculum 33 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 9 

Class Attendance 11 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 78 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 12 

Community Scholarships 70 

Computer Science Curriculum 47 

Conduct, Standards of 66 

Contents 2 



Contingency Deposits 69 

Cooperative Programs 17 

Engineering 17 

Environmental Studies 17 

Forestry 17 

Medical Technology 17 

Military Science 18 

Optometry 18 

Pediatric Medicine 18 

Sculpture 19 

Counseling, Academic 8 

Counseling, Personal 65 

Course Credit by Examination 11 

Course Descriptions 23 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 35 

Curriculum 23 

Damage Charges 66 

Degree Programs 5 

Degree Requirements 5 

Dental School, Advisement for 9 

Departmental Honors 14 

Departmental Majors 7 

Deposits 69 

Deposit Refunds 69 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts 7 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 7 

Mathematics 7 

Natural Science 7 

Philosophy 7 

Religion 7 

Early Admission Procedure 68 

Economics Curriculum 36 

Education Curriculum 37 

Education Financing Plans 73 

Educational Opportunity Grants .... 72 
Engineering, Cooperative Program 17 

English Curriculum 38 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) .... 12 

Entry Fees and Deposits 69 

Environmental Studies 17 

Established Interdisciplinary Major 

(EIM) 7 

Expenses 69 

Faculty 79 

Federal Grants and Loans 72 

Fees 69 

Financial Aid 69 

Financial Assistance 69 

Financial Information 69 

Fine Arts Requirements 5 

Foreign Language Requirement .... 6 



Foreign Languages and 

Literatures Curriculum 40 

Forestry, Cooperative Program 17 

French Curriculum 41 

General Expenses 69 

German Curriculum 41 

Grading System 10 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Grants-in-Aid 70 

Greek Curriculum 42 

Health Professions Careers 9 

Health Services 66 

Hebrew Curriculum 42 

History Curriculum 43 

History of the College 4 

History Requirements 7 

Honor Societies 12 

Independent Study 15 

Interdisciplinary Majors 7 

Established Majors (EIM) 7 

Individual Majors (IIM) 8 

International Studies 45 

Internship Programs 16 

Interviews 68 

Johnson Atelier 26 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 9 

Literature (EIM) 45 

Loans 72 

Location 4 

London Semester 19 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 7 

Mass Communication (EIM) 46 

Mathematical Sciences 47 

Mathematics Requirements 6 

May Term 16 

Medical School, Advisement for ... 9 

Medical History 66 

Medical Staff 66 

Medical Technology 17 

Military Science 18 

Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 70 

Minor 8 

Music Curriculum 50 

National Direct Student Loans 

(NDSL) 72 

Natural Science Requirement 7 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

(EIM) 51 

Nursing 52 

Optometry 18 

Optometry School, Advisement for 9 
Osteopathy School, Advisement for 9 



89 



Part-time Student Opportunities .... 16 

Payment of Fees 65 

Payments, Partial 65 

Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees 65 

Philadelphia Semester 18 

Philosophy Curticulum 55 

Philosophy Requirement 6 

Physical Education Curriculum 56 

Physics Curriculum 27 

Placement Services 65 

Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative 

Program 18 

Political Science Curriculum 56 

Psychology Curticulum 58 

Refunds 65 

Registration 9 

Regulations (Standards of Conduct) 66 

Religion Curriculum 59 

Religion Requirement 6 



Repeated Courses 10 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 18 

Residence and Residence Halls 65 

Scholarships 70 

Scholarships (ROTC) 73 

Scholar Program 19 

Sculpture 26 

Social Science Requirement 7 

Sociology-Anthropology Curticulum 60 

Spanish Curticulum 42 

Special Features 15 

Independent Study 15 

Internship Program 16 

May Term 16 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 16 

State Grants and Loans 72 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 19 
Student Records 11 



Student Services 65 

Study Abroad 16 

Summer Session Calendar 76 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 72 

Theatre Curticulum 62 

Theological Professions, 

Advisement 9 

Unit Course System 10 

United Nations Semester 19 

Veterinary School, Advisement for 9 

Washington Semester 19 

Withdrawal from College 69 

Women's Studies 64 

Work-Study Grants 73 

Writing Across The 

Curriculum Program 6 




90 



>■«* 






iSr 



v.. 






ff